[go: up one dir, main page]

TW201819185A - Adhesive sheet laminate, shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and method for producing same - Google Patents

Adhesive sheet laminate, shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and method for producing same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201819185A
TW201819185A TW106131371A TW106131371A TW201819185A TW 201819185 A TW201819185 A TW 201819185A TW 106131371 A TW106131371 A TW 106131371A TW 106131371 A TW106131371 A TW 106131371A TW 201819185 A TW201819185 A TW 201819185A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
adhesive sheet
material layer
adhesive
sheet laminate
elastic modulus
Prior art date
Application number
TW106131371A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI761369B (en
Inventor
佐藤記央
稲永誠
鈴木加苗
村中達也
Original Assignee
日商三菱化學股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2017042839A external-priority patent/JP6880839B2/en
Application filed by 日商三菱化學股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商三菱化學股份有限公司
Publication of TW201819185A publication Critical patent/TW201819185A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI761369B publication Critical patent/TWI761369B/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J11/00Features of adhesives not provided for in group C09J9/00, e.g. additives
    • C09J11/02Non-macromolecular additives
    • C09J11/06Non-macromolecular additives organic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J4/00Adhesives based on organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond ; adhesives, based on monomers of macromolecular compounds of groups C09J183/00 - C09J183/16
    • C09J4/06Organic non-macromolecular compounds having at least one polymerisable carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bond in combination with a macromolecular compound other than an unsaturated polymer of groups C09J159/00 - C09J187/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/10Adhesives in the form of films or foils without carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/21Paper; Textile fabrics
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/22Plastics; Metallised plastics
    • C09J7/24Plastics; Metallised plastics based on macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/241Polyolefin, e.g.rubber
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/22Plastics; Metallised plastics
    • C09J7/25Plastics; Metallised plastics based on macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/255Polyesters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2423/00Presence of polyolefin
    • C09J2423/005Presence of polyolefin in the release coating
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2423/00Presence of polyolefin
    • C09J2423/10Presence of homo or copolymers of propene
    • C09J2423/105Presence of homo or copolymers of propene in the release coating
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2467/00Presence of polyester
    • C09J2467/005Presence of polyester in the release coating

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Adhesives Or Adhesive Processes (AREA)
  • Organic Insulating Materials (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is an adhesive sheet laminate provided with an adhesive material layer and a cover portion I peelably laminated on one surface of the adhesive material layer, as a novel adhesive sheet laminate with which it is possible to form an uneven shape matching an uneven portion of an adherend surface at high accuracy on the adhesive material layer surface, wherein the adhesive sheet laminate is characterized in that the storage modulus E'(MA) of the cover portion I at 100 DEG C is 1.0*10<SP>6</SP> to 2.0*10<SP>9</SP> Pa, and the storage modulus E'(MB) of the cover portion I at 30 DEG C is 5.0*10<SP>7</SP> to 1.0*10<SP>10</SP> Pa.

Description

黏著片材積層體、賦形黏著片材積層體及其製造方法Adhesive sheet laminated body, shaped adhesive sheet laminated body and manufacturing method thereof

本發明係關於一種於形成例如個人電腦、移動終端(PDA(personal digital assistant,個人數位助理))、遊戲機、電視(TV)、汽車導航系統、觸控面板、手寫板等之類之圖像顯示裝置時可適宜地使用之賦形黏著片材積層體、及適宜形成賦形黏著片材積層體之黏著片材積層體。The present invention relates to a method for forming images such as a personal computer, a mobile terminal (PDA (personal digital assistant)), a game machine, a television (TV), a car navigation system, a touch panel, a handwriting tablet, and the like. The shaped adhesive sheet laminated body which can be suitably used in a display device, and the adhesive sheet laminated body which is suitable for forming the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body.

觸控面板方式之圖像顯示裝置通常係將表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板(亦統稱為「圖像顯示裝置用構成構件」)組合而構成。 近年來,智慧型手機或平板終端等觸控面板方式之圖像顯示裝置之表面保護面板於使用強化玻璃之同時使用丙烯酸系樹脂板或聚碳酸酯板等塑膠材,該表面保護面板之視認開口面部以外之周緣部被印刷為黑色。 又,於觸控面板中,與玻璃感測器一併使用塑膠膜感測器,或使用將觸控面板功能與表面保護面板一體化而成之被稱為單片觸控(TOL)之構件,或使用將觸控面板功能一體化於圖像顯示面板中而成之被稱為表嵌式或內嵌式之構件。 於該種圖像顯示裝置中,為了進一步提高圖像視認性,通常為以液狀接著劑、熱塑性接著片材、黏著片材等透明之樹脂填埋各圖像顯示裝置用構成構件間之空隙之結構。 此外,於以行動電話或移動終端為中心之圖像顯示裝置之領域,除了薄壁化、高精密化以外,設計之多樣化不斷發展,先前通常於表面保護面板之周緣部以框狀印刷黑色之隱蔽部,但隨著設計之多樣化,開始以黑色以外之顏色形成該框狀之隱蔽部。於以黑色以外之顏色形成隱蔽部之情形時,由於隱蔽性較低,因此有與黑色相比,隱蔽部、即印刷部之高度變高之傾向。因此,對於用以貼合具備此種印刷部之構成構件之黏著片材,要求追隨較大之印刷階差而填充各角落。 因此,自先前起,提出有各種用以填埋印刷階差之方法。 例如於專利文獻1中,作為即使貼合黏著片材之被黏著面具有因印刷等形成之階差,亦可無間隙地以密接狀貼合於被黏著面之新圖像顯示裝置用雙面黏著片材,而揭示有一種圖像顯示裝置用雙面黏著片材,其係用以將選自表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板之圖像顯示裝置用構成構件之任意2個被黏著體貼合之雙面黏著片材,且至少一被黏著體於欲黏著雙面黏著片材之被黏著面具有階差部,雙面黏著片材係使貼合於上述被黏著面之貼合面之形狀沿著上述被黏著面之面形狀賦形而成。 又,於專利文獻2中,關於用以將選自表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板之任意2個被黏著體貼合之雙面黏著片材之製造方法,而揭示有一種圖像顯示裝置用雙面黏著片材之製造方法,其特徵在於:貼合前之雙面黏著片材係使用凝膠分率未達40%之黏著劑組合物,賦形為與上述被黏著體之貼合面之凹凸形狀相同之面形狀。 先前技術文獻 專利文獻 專利文獻1:WO2014/073316 A1 專利文獻2:WO2015/174392 A1An image display device of a touch panel method is generally constituted by combining a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel (also collectively referred to as "constituent members for an image display device"). In recent years, a surface protection panel of an image display device of a touch panel method such as a smart phone or a tablet terminal uses a reinforced glass while using a plastic material such as an acrylic resin plate or a polycarbonate plate. The peripheral portions other than the face are printed in black. Moreover, in the touch panel, a plastic film sensor is used together with the glass sensor, or a component called a one-piece touch (TOL) that integrates the touch panel function and the surface protection panel is used. , Or use a component called a surface-embedded or embedded-type that integrates touch panel functions into an image display panel. In this type of image display device, in order to further improve the visibility of the image, a gap between the constituent members for each image display device is usually filled with a transparent resin such as a liquid adhesive, a thermoplastic adhesive sheet, or an adhesive sheet. The structure. In addition, in the field of image display devices centered on mobile phones or mobile terminals, in addition to thinning and high-precision, the diversification of design continues to develop. Previously, black was usually printed in a frame shape on the periphery of the surface protection panel. As the design diversifies, the frame-shaped concealed portion starts to be formed in a color other than black. When the concealed portion is formed in a color other than black, the concealability is low, and therefore the height of the concealed portion, that is, the printed portion is higher than that of black. Therefore, it is required to fill each corner of an adhesive sheet for bonding a constituent member provided with such a printing section in accordance with a large printing step. Therefore, since the past, various methods have been proposed for filling the printing step. For example, in Patent Document 1, a double-sided image display device for double-sided use as a new image display device that can be closely adhered to an adhered surface without a gap even if the adhered surface of the adhered adhesive sheet has a step difference formed by printing or the like. An adhesive sheet is disclosed, and a double-sided adhesive sheet for an image display device is disclosed, which is used to select any two components of an image display device selected from a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel. The double-sided adhesive sheet adhered by the adherend, and at least one of the adherends has a stepped portion on the adhered surface of the double-sided adherent sheet to be adhered, and the double-sided adhesive sheet is made to adhere to the above-mentioned adhered surface. The shape of the joint surface is shaped along the surface shape of the adhered surface. Further, in Patent Document 2, a method for manufacturing a double-sided adhesive sheet for bonding any two adherends selected from a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel is disclosed, and an image is disclosed. The manufacturing method of a double-sided adhesive sheet for a display device is characterized in that: the double-sided adhesive sheet before lamination uses an adhesive composition having a gel fraction of less than 40%, and is shaped as the same as the above-mentioned adherend. The uneven shape of the bonding surface is the same surface shape. Prior Art Literature Patent Literature Patent Literature 1: WO2014 / 073316 A1 Patent Literature 2: WO2015 / 174392 A1

[發明所欲解決之問題] 近年來,於以行動電話或移動終端為中心之圖像顯示裝置之領域,進一步要求薄壁化、高精密化,對於用以貼合圖像顯示裝置構成構件之黏著片材,亦要求能夠高精度地填充印刷階差等被黏著體表面之凹凸部,並且不存在黏著材露出至外側之情況。作為針對該要求之對策,如上述先前專利文獻所揭示般,研究使黏著片材之表面形狀預先與被黏著體之表面形狀吻合而形成。 此外,為了如上所述使黏著片材之表面形狀預先與被黏著體之表面形狀吻合而形成,而假定如下方法:將離型片材積層於黏著片材之兩側而成之黏著片材積層體進行加壓成型,而形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。 然而,嘗試使用通常之離型片材積層於黏著片材之兩側而成之黏著片材積層體,實際實施上述方法,結果明瞭如下課題:難以於黏著片材表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。 因此,本發明關於具備黏著材層、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之單面而成之被覆部之黏著片材積層體,而提出一種能夠於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀之新黏著片材積層體、及使用該黏著片材積層體之賦形黏著片材積層體。 [解決問題之技術手段] 本發明提出一種黏著片材積層體,其係具備黏著材層、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之單面而成之被覆部I之黏著片材積層體,其特徵在於:上述被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且上述被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa。 又,作為使用上述黏著片材積層體之賦形黏著片材積層體,本發明提出一種賦形黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」),並且上述被覆部I密接於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面,於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被覆部表面凹凸部」),且於與上述正面及背面之一側為相反側之正面及背面之另一側表面具備形成有與上述黏著材層表面凹凸部相符之凹凸的凸部、凹部或凸凹部(稱為「被覆部背面凸凹部」)。 [發明之效果] 根據本發明所提出之黏著片材積層體,例如,藉由將上述黏著片材積層體加熱後,將模具壓抵於被覆部I進行成型,而可於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。又,由於被覆部I於常態下可維持形狀保持性,因此操作較為容易,不僅如此,由於其並未過硬,因此可抑制於黏著材層形成非意圖需要之凹凸。 本發明所提出之賦形黏著片材積層體於黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面具備黏著片材表面凹凸部,且上述被覆部I密接於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面,於正面及背面之一側表面具備被覆部表面凹凸部,且於與上述正面及背面之一側為相反側之正面及背面之另一側表面具備被覆部背面凸凹部。如上所述,本發明所提出之賦形黏著片材積層體因具備上述被覆部I無間隙地密接於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面,且上述被覆部I以可剝離之方式積層於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面而成之構成,因此可防止灰塵等附著於黏著材層之表面而黏著力降低等情況,並且亦可防止形成於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面而成之黏著材層表面凹凸部之形狀吸收空氣中之水分而崩解,或灰塵等附著於表面而黏著力降低之情況。[Problems to be Solved by the Invention] In recent years, in the field of image display devices centered on mobile phones or mobile terminals, thinner walls and higher precision have been demanded. The adhesive sheet is also required to be able to accurately fill uneven portions on the surface of the adherend such as a printing step, and there is no case where the adhesive material is exposed to the outside. As a countermeasure against this requirement, as disclosed in the aforementioned prior patent documents, it has been studied to form the surface shape of the adhesive sheet in advance with the surface shape of the adherend. In addition, in order to form the surface shape of the adhesive sheet in advance with the surface shape of the adherend as described above, the following method is assumed: an adhesive sheet laminate formed by laminating a release sheet on both sides of the adhesive sheet The body is press-molded to form an uneven shape conforming to the uneven portion on the surface of the adherend. However, an attempt was made to use an adhesive sheet laminated body formed by laminating ordinary release sheets on both sides of the adhesive sheet and actually implementing the above method. As a result, it was clear that it was difficult to form and adhere the surface of the adhesive sheet with high accuracy. Concave-convex shape on the body surface. Therefore, the present invention relates to an adhesive sheet laminate having an adhesive material layer and a covering portion formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, and proposes a highly accurate formation on the surface of the adhesive material layer. A new adhesive sheet laminate having a concave-convex shape corresponding to the uneven portion on the surface of the adherend, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate using the adhesive sheet laminate. [Technical means to solve the problem] The present invention proposes an adhesive sheet laminate, which is an adhesive sheet laminate including an adhesive material layer and a coating portion I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner. The body is characterized in that the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C is 1.0 × 10 6 to 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus of the coating portion I at 30 ° C E '(MB) is 5.0 × 10 7 to 1.0 × 10 10 Pa. In addition, as the shaped adhesive sheet laminate using the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, the present invention proposes a shaped adhesive sheet laminate, wherein the adhesive layer is provided with recesses, protrusions, or Concavo-convex portions (referred to as "concave-convex portions on the surface of the adhesive material layer"), and the coating portion I is in close contact with one of the front and back surfaces of the adhesive material layer, and has concave, convex, or uneven portions on the front and back surfaces Part (referred to as "concave-convex part of the surface of the coating part"), and the surface on the other side of the front side and the back side opposite to one of the front side and the back side is provided with an irregularity corresponding to the surface uneven side of the adhesive layer. Convex, concave, or convex-concave (referred to as "convex-convex convex-concave"). [Effects of the Invention] The adhesive sheet laminate according to the present invention can be formed on the surface of the adhesive material layer by heating the adhesive sheet laminate and then pressing the mold against the coating portion I to form the adhesive sheet laminate. The unevenness is accurately formed to match the unevenness on the surface of the adherend. In addition, since the coating portion I can maintain the shape retention property in the normal state, the operation is relatively easy. Moreover, since the coating portion I is not too hard, it can prevent the adhesive material layer from forming irregularities that are not intended. The shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to the present invention has uneven portions on the adhesive sheet surface on one of the front and back sides of the adhesive sheet layer, and the coating portion I is in close contact with one of the front and back sides of the adhesive sheet layer. The front surface and the back surface are provided with a covered portion surface uneven portion, and the front and back surfaces on the other side of the front and back surfaces are provided with the covered portion rear surface concave and convex portions. As described above, the shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to the present invention is provided with the coating portion I and is in close contact with one side surface of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer without gaps, and the coating portion I is peelable. It is formed by laminating on one side surface of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer, so that it can prevent dust and the like from adhering to the surface of the adhesive material layer and reducing the adhesion, and it can also prevent the formation of the adhesive material layer on the front surface. The shape of the concave-convex part of the surface of the adhesive material layer formed on one side surface of the back surface absorbs moisture in the air and disintegrates, or the adhesion of dust and the like on the surface decreases.

以下,對本發明之實施形態之一例進行說明。但本發明並不受下述實施形態所限制。 [本黏著片材積層體] 本發明之實施形態之一例的黏著片材積層體(稱為「本黏著片材積層體」)如圖1所示,係具備黏著材層、以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之一側而成之被覆部I、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側而成之被覆部II的黏著片材積層體。此處,被覆部II為任意,亦可採用不積層被覆部II之構成。 <黏著材層> 本黏著片材積層體之黏著材層只要為若將被覆部I及被覆部II剝離則可作為雙面黏著片材而發揮功能,且具有若加熱則會柔軟化或熔融之熱熔性者即可。 黏著材層較佳為於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SA)為1.0以上。又,較佳為於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SB)未達1.0。 此處,損耗正切tanδ意指損耗彈性模數G''與儲存彈性模數G'之比(G''/G')。 由於將本黏著片材積層體進行加熱成型時之溫度通常為70~120℃,故而若於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SA)為1.0以上,則變得容易於黏著材層表面成型凹凸形狀。 又,若黏著材層於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SB)未達1.0,則於常態下可保持形狀,因此可保持於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀之狀態。 通常高分子材料兼具黏性性質與彈性性質,損耗正切tanδ為1.0以上,進而其值越大,黏性性質越強。另一方面,損耗正切tanδ未達1.0,進而其值越小,彈性性質越強。因此,藉由控制黏著材層於不同溫度下之損耗正切tanδ,可兼具成形性與形狀保持性。 就該觀點而言,黏著材層於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SA)較佳為1.0以上,其中較佳為1.5以上或30以下,其中較佳為3.0以上或20以下。 另一方面,黏著材層於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SB)較佳為未達1.0,其中較佳為0.01以上或0.9以下,其中較佳為0.1以上或0.8以下。 此處,黏著材層於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SA)及於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SB)可藉由調整構成黏著材層之組合物之成分或凝膠分率、重量平均分子量等而調整為上述範圍。 進而,黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)較佳為未達1.0×104 Pa。又,上述黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)較佳為1.0×104 Pa以上。 若黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)未達1.0×104 Pa,則可獲得充分之成形性,故而較佳,另一方面,若黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)為1.0×104 Pa以上,則就成形後之形狀穩定性之觀點而言較佳。 就該觀點而言,黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)較佳為未達1.0×104 Pa,其中進而較佳為5.0×101 Pa以上或5.0×103 Pa以下,其中進而較佳為1.0×102 Pa以上或1.0×103 Pa以下。 據此,黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)更佳為5.0×101 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa,或為5.0×101 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下,其中進而較佳為1.0×102 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa,或為1.0×102 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下,最佳為1.0×102 Pa以上且1.0×103 Pa以下。 又,就該觀點而言,黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)較佳為1.0×104 Pa以上,其中進而較佳為2.0×104 Pa以上或1.0×107 Pa以下,其中進而較佳為5.0×104 Pa以上或1.0×106 Pa以下。 又,據此,黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)更佳為1.0×104 Pa以上且1.0×107 Pa以下,或為1.0×104 Pa以上且1.0×106 Pa以下,其中更佳為2.0×104 Pa以上且1.0×107 Pa以下,或為2.0×104 Pa以上且1.0×106 Pa以下,最佳為5.0×104 Pa以上且1.0×106 Pa以下。 此處,黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)及黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)可藉由調整構成黏著材層之組合物之成分或凝膠分率、重量平均分子量等而調整為上述範圍。 黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ成為1.0之溫度較佳為50~150℃,其中進而較佳為60℃以上或130℃以下,其中進而較佳為70℃以上或110℃以下。 若黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ成為1.0之溫度為50~150℃,則可藉由預先將本黏著片材積層體加熱為50~150℃而進行模具成形。 黏著材層之基礎樹脂之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳為-50~40℃,其中進而較佳為-30℃以上或25℃以下,其中進而較佳為-10℃以上或20℃以下。此處,玻璃轉移溫度之測定係指使用示差掃描熱量計(DSC)而以3℃/分鐘之速度升溫時的基線移動之反曲點間之中點。 若黏著材層之基礎樹脂之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)為上述範圍,則可對黏著材層賦予黏著性,進而,可將黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ成為1.0之溫度調整為50~150℃。 作為黏著材層之材料,只要為可製備為特定黏彈性行為之材料,則可使用先前公知之黏著片材。 例如可列舉:1)使用(甲基)丙烯酸酯系聚合物(為包括共聚物在內之含義,以下稱為「丙烯酸酯系(共)聚合物」)作為基礎樹脂,於其中調配交聯單體、視需要調配交聯起始劑或反應觸媒等,使其等進行交聯反應所形成之黏著片材;或 2)使用丁二烯或異戊二烯系共聚物作為基礎樹脂,於其中調配交聯單體、視需要調配交聯起始劑或反應觸媒等,使其等進行交聯反應所形成之黏著片材;或 3)使用聚矽氧系聚合物作為基礎樹脂,於其中調配交聯單體、視需要調配交聯起始劑或反應觸媒等,使其等進行交聯反應所形成之黏著片材;或 4)使用聚胺基甲酸酯系聚合物作為基礎樹脂之聚胺基甲酸酯系黏著片材等。 黏著材層本身之物性中除了上述之黏彈性性質或熱性質以外,於本發明中並非本質上之問題。但就黏著性、透明性、及耐候性等觀點而言,較佳為以上述1)之丙烯酸酯系(共)聚合物作為基礎樹脂者。 於要求電氣特性、低折射率等性能之情形時,較佳為以上述2)之丁二烯或異戊二烯系共聚物作為基礎樹脂者。 於要求耐熱性、較廣之溫度範圍中之橡膠彈性等性能之情形時,較佳為以上述3)之聚矽氧系共聚物作為基礎樹脂者。 於要求再剝離性等性能之情形時,較佳為以上述4)之聚胺基甲酸酯系聚合物作為基礎樹脂者。 作為上述黏著材層之一例,可例示由含有作為基礎樹脂之(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)、交聯劑(b)、及光聚合起始劑(c)之樹脂組合物所形成之黏著片材。 於該情形時,必須於未交聯狀態、即形成立體地交聯之網狀結構前之狀態下滿足上述黏彈性特性。就該觀點而言,黏著材層之凝膠分率較佳為40%以下。 若黏著材層之凝膠分率為40%以下,則可將構成黏著材層之分子鏈彼此之鍵結抑制於適當之範圍,故而於成形為賦形黏著片材積層體時可具備適度之流動性。 就該觀點而言,黏著材層之凝膠分率較佳為40%以下,其中尤佳為20%以下,其中尤佳為10%以下。再者,黏著材層之凝膠分率之下限並無限定,亦可為0%。 再者,上述黏著材層之凝膠分率並不限於使用含有作為基礎樹脂之(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)、交聯劑(b)、及光聚合起始劑(c)之樹脂組合物之情形,使用其他樹脂組合物作為黏著材層之情形時亦相同。 ((甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)) (甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)可根據用於使其聚合之丙烯酸系單體或甲基丙烯酸系單體之種類、組成比率、進而聚合條件等而適當調整玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)等特性。 作為用於使丙烯酸酯聚合物聚合之丙烯酸系單體或甲基丙烯酸系單體,例如可列舉:丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸正丁酯、丙烯酸乙酯、甲基丙烯酸甲酯等。亦可使用使該等與親水基或有機官能基等共聚合而成之乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯酸羥基乙酯、丙烯酸、丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、丙烯醯胺、丙烯腈、甲基丙烯腈、氟丙烯酸酯、聚矽氧丙烯酸酯等。 丙烯酸酯聚合物中尤佳為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯系共聚物。 作為用於形成(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯系共聚物之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、即丙烯酸烷基酯或甲基丙烯酸烷基酯成分,較佳為烷基為正辛基、異辛基、2-乙基己基、正丁基、異丁基、甲基、乙基、異丙基中之任一者之丙烯酸烷基酯或甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之1種或者選自該等之2種以上之混合物。 作為其他成分,亦可使具有羧基、羥基、縮水甘油基等有機官能基之丙烯酸酯或甲基丙烯酸酯進行共聚合。具體而言,可以適當地選擇性地組合上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯成分與具有有機官能基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯成分而成之單體成分作為起始原料進行加熱聚合,而獲得(甲基)丙烯酸酯系共聚物聚合物。 其中,較佳可列舉丙烯酸異辛酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸正丁酯、丙烯酸2-乙基己酯等丙烯酸烷基酯之1種或選自該等之2種以上之混合物,或者可列舉使丙烯酸異辛酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸正丁酯、丙烯酸2-乙基己酯等中之至少1種以上與丙烯酸進行共聚合而成者。 作為使用該等單體之聚合處理,可採用溶液聚合、乳化聚合、塊狀聚合、懸浮聚合等公知之聚合方法,此時根據聚合方法而使用熱聚合起始劑或光聚合起始劑等聚合起始劑,藉此可獲得丙烯酸酯共聚物。 (丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)) 作為黏著材層之較佳之基礎聚合物之一例,可列舉包含具有巨單體作為支鏈成分之接枝共聚物之(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)。 若以上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)作為基礎樹脂而構成黏著材層,則黏著材層可於室溫狀態下保持片材狀並且表現出自黏性,具有若於未交聯狀態下加熱則會熔融或流動之熱熔性,進而,可使其光硬化,光硬化後可使其發揮優異之凝聚力而使其接著。 因此,若使用丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)作為黏著材層之基礎聚合物,則即使為未交聯狀態,亦於室溫(20℃)下表現出黏著性,且具有若加熱為50~100℃、更佳為60℃以上或90℃以下之溫度則會軟化或流動化之性質。 構成上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分之共聚物之玻璃轉移溫度較佳為-70~0℃。 此時,所謂構成主鏈成分之共聚物成分之玻璃轉移溫度係指僅使組成丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分之單體成分進行共聚合所獲得之聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度。具體而言,意指根據由該共聚物各成分之均聚物所獲得之聚合物之玻璃轉移溫度與構成比率,藉由Fox之計算式所算出之值。 再者,所謂Fox之計算式係藉由以下之式求出之計算值,可使用聚合物手冊[Polymer HandBook, J.Brandrup, Interscience, 1989]所記載之值而求出。 1/(273+Tg)=Σ(Wi/(273+Tgi)) [式中,Wi表示單體i之重量分率,Tgi表示單體i之均聚物之Tg(℃)] 由於構成上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分之共聚物成分之玻璃轉移溫度會影響到室溫狀態下之黏著材層之柔軟性、或黏著材層對被黏著體之潤濕性、即接著性,因此為了黏著材層於室溫狀態下獲得適度之接著性(黏性),該玻璃轉移溫度較佳為-70℃~0℃,其中尤佳為-65℃以上或-5℃以下,其中尤佳為-60℃以上或-10℃以下。 但即使該共聚物成分之玻璃轉移溫度為相同之溫度,亦可藉由調整分子量而調整黏彈性。例如藉由減小共聚物成分之分子量,可使其進一步柔軟化。 作為上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分所含之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體,例如可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸新戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁基環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸鯨蠟酯、(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸山萮酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-苯氧基乙酯、丙烯酸3,5,5-三甲基環己酯、對異丙苯基苯酚EO改性(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊烯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊烯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等。該等亦可使用:具有親水基或有機官能基等之(甲基)丙烯酸羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甘油酯等含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;或(甲基)丙烯酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基順丁烯二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基順丁烯二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基丁二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基丁二酸、丁烯酸、反丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸單甲酯、伊康酸單甲酯等含羧基單體;順丁烯二酸酐、伊康酸酐等含酸酐基單體;(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、α-乙基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3,4-環氧丁酯等含環氧基單體;(甲基)丙烯酸二甲胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二乙胺基乙酯等含胺基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯系單體;(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-第三丁基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-羥甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-甲氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-丁氧基甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、雙丙酮丙烯醯胺、順丁烯二醯胺、順丁烯二醯亞胺等含有醯胺基之單體;乙烯基吡咯啶酮、乙烯基吡啶、乙烯基咔唑等雜環系鹼性單體等。 又,亦可適當地使用能夠與上述丙烯酸系單體或甲基丙烯酸系單體共聚合之苯乙烯、第三丁基苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、丙烯腈、甲基丙烯腈、乙酸乙烯酯、丙酸乙烯酯、烷基乙烯醚、羥基烷基乙烯醚、烷基乙烯基單體等各種乙烯基單體。 又,丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分較佳為含有疏水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體與親水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體作為構成單元。 若丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分僅由疏水性單體構成,則可觀察到濕熱白化之傾向,故而較佳為亦將親水性單體導入至主鏈成分中而防止濕熱白化。 具體而言,作為上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之主鏈成分,可列舉疏水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體、親水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體、及巨單體之末端之聚合性官能基進行無規共聚合而成之共聚物成分。 此處,作為上述之疏水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體,例如可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸新戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁基環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸鯨蠟酯、(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸山萮酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊烯氧基乙酯、甲基丙烯酸甲酯。 又,作為疏水性之乙烯基單體,可列舉:乙酸乙烯酯、苯乙烯、第三丁基苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、烷基乙烯基單體等。 作為上述親水性之(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體,例如可列舉:丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸、(甲基)丙烯酸四氫糠酯;或(甲基)丙烯酸羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甘油酯等含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;或(甲基)丙烯酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基鄰苯二甲酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基順丁烯二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基順丁烯二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基丁二酸、2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基丁二酸、丁烯酸、反丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸、伊康酸、順丁烯二酸單甲酯、伊康酸單甲酯等含羧基單體;順丁烯二酸酐、伊康酸酐等含酸酐基單體;(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、α-乙基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3,4-環氧丁酯等含環氧基單體;甲氧基聚乙二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等烷氧基聚伸烷基二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯;N,N-二甲基丙烯醯胺、羥基乙基丙烯醯胺等等。 丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)較佳為導入巨單體作為接枝共聚物之支鏈成分,而含有源自巨單體之重複單元。 所謂巨單體係具有末端之聚合性官能基與高分子量骨架成分之高分子單體。 巨單體之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳為高於構成上述丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)之共聚物成分之玻璃轉移溫度。 具體而言,由於巨單體之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)會影響到黏著材層2之加熱熔融溫度(熱熔溫度),因此巨單體之玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳為30℃~120℃,其中進而較佳為40℃以上或110℃以下,其中進而較佳為50℃以上或100℃以下。 若為此種玻璃轉移溫度(Tg),則可藉由調整分子量而保持優異之加工性或保管穩定性,並且可以於80℃附近熱熔之方式加以調整。 所謂巨單體之玻璃轉移溫度係指該巨單體本身之玻璃轉移溫度,可藉由示差掃描熱量計(DSC)進行測定。 又,為了達成於室溫狀態下可維持支鏈成分彼此相互拉近,作為黏著劑組合物進行物理性交聯之狀態,並且藉由加熱至適度之溫度可使上述物理性交聯解開而獲得流動性,亦較佳為調整巨單體之分子量或含量。 就該觀點而言,巨單體較佳為以5質量%~30質量%之比例含有於丙烯酸系共聚物(A1)中,其中較佳為6質量%以上或25質量%以下,其中較佳為8質量%以上或20質量%以下。 又,巨單體之數量平均分子量較佳為500以上且未達8000,其中較佳為800以上或未達7500,其中較佳為1000以上或未達7000。 巨單體可適當使用通常製造者(例如東亞合成公司製造之巨單體等)。 巨單體之高分子量骨架成分較佳為包含丙烯酸系聚合物或乙烯系聚合物。 作為上述巨單體之高分子量骨架成分,例如可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第二丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸新戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、丙烯酸正辛酯、丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁基環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸鯨蠟酯、(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異硬脂酯、(甲基)丙烯酸山萮酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-苯氧基乙酯、丙烯酸3,5,5-三甲基環己酯、對異丙苯基苯酚EO改性(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊烯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸雙環戊烯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯、(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸、(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N,N-二甲基(甲基)丙烯醯胺、(甲基)丙烯腈、(甲基)丙烯酸烷氧基烷基酯、烷氧基聚伸烷基二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體;或苯乙烯、第三丁基苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、烷基乙烯基單體、乙酸乙烯酯、烷基乙烯醚、羥基烷基乙烯醚等各種乙烯基單體,該等可單獨使用或組合2種以上使用。 作為上述巨單體之末端聚合性官能基,例如可列舉:甲基丙烯醯基、丙烯醯基、乙烯基等。 (交聯劑(b)) 交聯劑(b)可使用於使丙烯酸酯聚合物交聯時所使用之交聯單體。例如可列舉具有選自(甲基)丙烯醯基、環氧基、異氰酸酯基、羧基、羥基、碳二醯亞胺基、㗁唑啉基、氮丙啶基、乙烯基、胺基、亞胺基、醯胺基中之至少1種交聯性官能基之交聯劑,可使用1種或組合2種以上使用。 再者,上述交聯性官能基亦可經能夠去保護之保護基保護。 其中,可較佳地使用:具有2個以上(甲基)丙烯醯基之多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯;具有2個以上異氰酸酯基、環氧基、三聚氰胺基、二醇基、矽氧烷基、胺基等有機官能基之多官能有機官能基樹脂;具有鋅、鋁、鈉、鋯、鈣等之金屬錯合物的有機金屬化合物。 作為上述多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可列舉:1,4-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、甘油二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、甘油縮水甘油醚二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、雙酚A聚乙氧基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、雙酚A聚烷氧基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、雙酚F聚烷氧基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚伸烷基二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三氧基乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯、ε-己內酯改性三(2-羥基乙基)異氰尿酸酯三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙氧化季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙氧化季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙氧化季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙氧化季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三(丙烯醯氧基乙基)異氰尿酸酯、季戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三季戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、羥基特戊酸新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、羥基特戊酸新戊二醇之ε-己內酯加成物之二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、烷氧化三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二(三羥甲基丙烷)四(甲基)丙烯酸酯等紫外線硬化型之多官能單體類,除此以外,可列舉:聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯、聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多官能丙烯酸酯低聚物類。 上述所列舉之中,就提高對被黏著體之密接性或抑制濕熱白化之效果之觀點而言,上述多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯單體中,較佳為含有羥基或羧基、醯胺基等極性官能基之多官能單體或低聚物。其中,較佳為使用具有羥基或醯胺基之多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 就防止濕熱白化之觀點而言,作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、例如接枝共聚物之主鏈成分,較佳為含有疏水性之丙烯酸酯單體與親水性之丙烯酸酯單體,進而,作為交聯劑,較佳為使用具有羥基之多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 又,為了調整密接性或耐濕熱性、耐熱性等效果,亦可進一步添加與交聯劑進行反應之單官能或多官能之(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 就使作為黏著劑組合物之柔軟性與凝聚力平衡之觀點而言,交聯劑之含量相對於上述(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物100質量份,較佳為以0.1~20質量份之比例含有,其中尤佳為0.5質量份以上或15質量份以下之比例,其中尤佳為1質量份以上或13質量份以下之比例。 (光聚合起始劑(c)) 於使丙烯酸酯聚合物交聯時,若適當添加交聯起始劑(過氧化起始劑、光聚合起始劑)或反應觸媒(三級胺系化合物、四級銨系化合物、月桂酸錫化合物等),則較為有效。 於紫外線照射交聯之情形時,較佳為調配光聚合起始劑(c)。 光聚合起始劑(c)根據自由基產生機制而大體分為2類,大致分為:可使光聚合性起始劑本身之單鍵斷裂分解而產生自由基之斷裂型光聚合起始劑;及光激發之起始劑與系統中之氫供與體形成激發錯合物而可使氫供與體之氫轉移之奪氫型光聚合起始劑。 該等中之斷裂型光聚合起始劑於藉由光照射而產生自由基時分解而成為其他化合物,一旦被激發則失去作為反應起始劑之功能。因此,若使用該分子內斷裂型作為於可見光區域內具有吸收波長之光聚合起始劑,則與使用奪氫型之情形相比,於藉由光線照射使黏著片材交聯後,光線反應性之光聚合性起始劑作為未反應殘渣殘留於本黏著劑組合物中而導致黏著片材之未預期之經時變化或促進交聯的可能性較低,故而較佳。又,關於光聚合性起始劑特有之著色,亦可適當選擇藉由成為反應分解物,使可見光區域之吸收消失而消色者,故而較佳。 另一方面,奪氫型之光聚合起始劑於藉由紫外線等活性能量線照射之產生自由基之反應時,不會產生如斷裂型光聚合起始劑之分解物,故而反應結束後難以成為揮發成分,可減少對被黏著體之損傷。 作為上述斷裂型光聚合起始劑,例如可列舉:2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮、1-羥基環己基苯基酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、1-(4-(2-羥基乙氧基)苯基)-2-羥基-2-甲基-1-丙烷-1-酮、2-羥基-1-[4-{4-(2-羥基-2-甲基-丙醯基)苄基}苯基]-2-甲基-丙烷-1-酮、低聚(2-羥基-2-甲基-1-(4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基)丙酮)、苯基乙醛酸甲酯、2-苄基-2-二甲胺基-1-(4-啉基苯基)丁烷-1-酮、2-甲基-1-[4-(甲硫基)苯基]-2-啉基丙烷-1-酮、2-(二甲胺基)-2-[(4-甲基苯基)甲基]-1-[4-(4-啉基)苯基]-1-丁酮、雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)-苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦、(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)乙氧基苯基氧化膦、雙(2,6-二甲氧基苯甲醯基)2,4,4-三甲基戊基氧化膦、或該等之衍生物等。 其中,就藉由斷裂型光聚合性起始劑,於反應後成為分解物而消色之方面而言,較佳為雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)-苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦、(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)乙氧基苯基氧化膦、雙(2,6-二甲氧基苯甲醯基)2,4,4-三甲基戊基氧化膦等醯基氧化膦系光起始劑。 進而,就與包含具備巨單體作為支鏈成分之接枝共聚物之丙烯酸系共聚物之相容性而言,較佳為使用2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦、(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)乙氧基苯基氧化膦、雙(2,6-二甲氧基苯甲醯基)2,4,4-三甲基戊基氧化膦等作為光聚合起始劑。 光聚合起始劑之含量並無特別限制。例如相對於(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物100質量份而以0.1~10質量份、其中尤佳為以0.2質量份以上或5質量份以下、其中尤佳為以0.5質量份以上或3質量份以下之比例而含有。但就與其他要素之平衡性之方面而言,亦可超過該範圍。 光聚合起始劑可使用1種或組合2種以上使用。 除了上述成分以外,亦可視需要而適當調配具有近紅外線吸收特性之顏料或染料等色素、黏著賦予劑、抗氧化劑、抗老化劑、吸濕劑、紫外線吸收劑、矽烷偶合劑、天然物或合成物之樹脂類、玻璃纖維或玻璃珠等各種添加劑。 (黏著材層之層結構及厚度) 黏著材層除了單層以外,亦可為兩層、三層等複數層。 又,黏著材層亦可為具有基材層(不具有黏著性之層)作為芯層,且於該基材層之兩側積層包含黏著材之層而成之構成。於此種構成之情形時,作為芯層之基材層較佳為具有變得能夠對黏著片材積層體進行加熱成型之材質或特性。又,較佳為除了基材層以外之黏著材層於損耗正切tanδ(SA)、損耗正切tanδ(SB)、儲存彈性模數G'(SA)及儲存彈性模數G'(SB)方面具有上述特性。 黏著材層之厚度並無特別限定。其中較佳為20 μm~500 μm之範圍。若為該範圍,例如若為如厚度20 μm之較薄之黏著材層,則可提供印刷階差追隨性優異之黏著片材。又,若為如厚度500 μm之較厚之黏著材層,則藉由預先賦形相當於印刷階差之量,亦變得能夠抑制貼合時之黏著材之溢出。 因此,黏著材層之厚度較佳為20 μm~500 μm,其中進而較佳為30 μm以上或300 μm以下,其中進而較佳為50 μm以上或200 μm以下。 <被覆部I> 本黏著片材積層體如圖1所示具備如下之被覆部I,該被覆部I係以可剝離之方式積層於對黏著材層之正面及背面之一側、例如正面賦形凹凸之側而成。 被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)較佳為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa。 由於對本黏著片材積層體進行加熱成型時之溫度通常為70~120℃,故而若於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,則於上述黏著劑組合物塑化至流動之溫度範圍內,被覆部I亦能夠充分地追隨凹凸形狀而變形,不僅如此,而且可於在成型時被被覆部I擠壓之黏著材層之表面高精度地、例如以避免角部變圓之方式成型所需凹凸形狀。 先前,作為積層於黏著片材之離型膜,多使用儲存彈性模數較高、換言之「較硬之」材料。其原因在於:對離型膜所要求之特性主要為保護黏著材層、及離型性。然而,根據本發明者等人之研究,發現於在將離型膜積層於黏著片材之狀態下進行加熱成形之新用途中,於要求加熱成型性之新課題之情形時,憑藉先前之離型膜所具備之如上所述之物理特性無法達成要求。因此,對加熱成型時所產生之現象、或黏著材層所具有之特性等進行了詳細調查,結果發現,設為與迄今為止通常使用之離型膜不同之特性對於解決加熱成型性之新課題而言有利。發現尤其是藉由將特定溫度下之儲存彈性模數控制為特定範圍,可解決上述課題。 就該觀點而言,被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)較佳為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,其中進而較佳為5.0×106 Pa以上或1.0×109 Pa以下,其中進而較佳為1.0×107 Pa以上或5.0×108 Pa以下。 據此,被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)更佳為1.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa、或1.0×106 ~5.0×108 Pa,其中,進而較佳為5.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa、或5.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa,最佳為1.0×107 ~1.0×109 Pa以下、或1.0×107 ~5.0×108 Pa。 又,被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)較佳為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa。 若被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa,則於常態下可維持形狀保持性,故而操作較容易,例如容易剝離,不僅如此,由於並未過硬,因此可抑制於黏著材層形成非意圖需要之凹凸。 就該觀點而言,被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)較佳為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa,其中進而較佳為1.0×108 Pa以上或8.0×109 Pa以下,其中進而較佳為1.0×109 Pa以上或5.0×109 Pa以下。 據此,被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)更佳為5.0×107 ~8.0×109 Pa、或5.0×107 ~5.0×109 Pa,其中,進而較佳為1.0×108 Pa~1.0×1010 Pa、或1.0×108 Pa~8.0×109 Pa,最佳為1.0×109 ~8.0×109 Pa、或1.0×109 ~5.0×109 Pa。 為了將被覆部I於30℃、100℃下之儲存彈性模數調整為上述,例如可藉由調整基礎樹脂之種類、共聚合樹脂成分、重量平均分子量、玻璃轉移溫度、結晶性等被覆部I之材料之條件,並且調整有無延伸、成形條件、於延伸之情形時調整延伸條件等製造條件而加以調整。但並不限定於該等方法。 進而,較佳為被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)、與被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)滿足以下之關係式(1)。 (1)・・E'(MB)/E'(MA)≧2.0 若被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)與被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)滿足上述關係式(1),則可獲得充分之成形性,故而更佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為E'(MB)/E'(MA)≧2.0,其中進而較佳為30≧E'(MB)/E'(MA)或E'(MB)/E'(MA)≧3.0,其中尤佳為10≧E'(MB)/E'(MA)或E'(MB)/E'(MA)≧5.0。 為了調整為E'(MB)與E'(MA)成為上述關係,例如可藉由調整基礎樹脂之種類、共聚合樹脂成分、重量平均分子量、玻璃轉移溫度、結晶性等被覆部I之材料之條件,並且調整有無延伸、成形條件、於延伸之情形時調整延伸條件等製造條件而加以調整。但並不限定於該等方法。 進而又,較佳為上述黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)與上述被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)滿足以下之關係式(2)。 (2)・・1.0×103 ≦E'(MA)/G'(SA)≦1.0×107 若上述黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)與上述被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)滿足上述關係式(2),則可獲得充分之成形性,故而更佳。 就該觀點而言,E'(MA)/G'(SA)較佳為1.0×103 ~1.0×107 ,其中尤佳為5.0×103 以上或5.0×106 以下,其中尤佳為1.0×104 以上或1.0×106 以下。 據此,E'(MA)/G'(SA)更佳為1.0×103 ~5.0×106 、或1.0×103 ~1.0×106 ,進而較佳為5.0×103 ~5.0×106 、或5.0×103 ~1.0×106 ,最佳為1.0×104 ~5.0×106 、或1.0×104 ~1.0×106 。 為了調整為E'(MA)及G'(SA)成為上述關係,調整黏著材層或被覆部I之特性即可。作為黏著材層之特性,例如可藉由調整構成黏著材層之組合物之成分或凝膠分率、重量平均分子量等而達成。又,作為被覆部I之特性,例如可藉由調整基礎樹脂之種類、共聚合樹脂成分、重量平均分子量、玻璃轉移溫度、結晶性等被覆部I之材料之條件,並且調整有無延伸、成形條件、於延伸之情形時調整延伸條件等製造條件而加以調整。但並不限定於該等方法。 對於被覆部I,進而於30℃環境下將上述被覆部I從黏著材層剝離時之剝離力F(C)較佳為0.2 N/cm以下。 若剝離力F(C)為0.2 N/cm以下,則可將上述被覆部I從黏著材層容易地剝離。 就該觀點而言,該剝離力F(C)較佳為0.2 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.01 N/cm以上或0.15 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.02 N/cm以上或0.1 N/cm以下。 進而,對於被覆部I,將黏著片材積層體於100℃下加熱5分鐘後冷卻至30℃,於30℃環境下將上述被覆部I從上述黏著材層剝離時之剝離力F(D)較佳為0.2 N/cm以下。 若將黏著片材積層體於100℃下加熱5分鐘後冷卻至30℃,並且於30℃環境下測得之剝離力F(D)與上述剝離力F(C)為相同程度,則即使將黏著片材積層體加熱成型,剝離力F(D)亦不發生變化,故而可將上述被覆部I從黏著材層容易地剝離。 就該觀點而言,該剝離力F(D)較佳為0.2 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.01 N/cm以上或0.15 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.02 N/cm以上或0.1 N/cm以下。 進而,被覆部I較佳為上述剝離力F(C)與上述剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值為0.1 N/cm以下。 若將黏著片材積層體於100℃下加熱5分鐘後冷卻至30℃,並且於30℃環境下測得之剝離力F(D)與通常狀態下之剝離力F(C)之差之絕對值為0.1 N/cm以下,則即使將黏著片材積層體加熱成型,剝離力F(D)亦不發生變化,故而可將上述被覆部I從黏著材層容易地剝離。 就該觀點而言,剝離力F(C)與剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值較佳為0.1 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.08 N/cm以下,其中進而較佳為0.05 N/cm以下。 再者,被覆部I之剝離力F(C)及剝離力F(D)可藉由形成於被覆部I之一側之離型層之種類等加以調製。但並不限定於該方法。 作為被覆部I之構成例,可列舉具備被覆基材層與離型層之構成例。藉由在被覆基材層之單面積層離型層,可以被覆部I容易從黏著材層剝離之方式構成。 此時,該被覆基材層較佳為具備以選自例如由聚酯、共聚合聚酯、聚烯烴及共聚合聚烯烴所組成之群中之1種樹脂或2種以上之樹脂作為主成分之延伸或未延伸之層、即包含以該等樹脂作為主成分之延伸或未延伸之膜之層的單層或複層。 其中,構成上述被覆部I之被覆基材層就機械強度或耐化學品性等觀點而言,較佳為具備包含以例如共聚合聚酯、聚烯烴、或共聚合聚烯烴作為主成分之延伸或未延伸之膜之層的單層或複層。 作為上述共聚合聚酯之具體例,例如可列舉:使作為二羧酸之間苯二甲酸、及作為二醇之環己烷二甲醇、1,4-丁二醇、二乙二醇等任意地共聚合而成之共聚合聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯。 作為上述聚烯烴之具體例,可列舉α-烯烴均聚物,例如可列舉丙烯均聚物或4-甲基戊烯-1之均聚物。 作為上述聚烯烴共聚物之具體例,例如可列舉:乙烯、丙烯、其他α-烯烴或乙烯基單體等之共聚物。 上述離型層較佳為製成除了聚矽氧等離型劑以外亦含有改性聚烯烴之層。 此處,作為構成上述離型層之改性烯烴,可列舉以經不飽和羧酸或其酸酐、或者矽烷系偶合劑改性之聚烯烴作為主成分之樹脂。 作為上述不飽和羧酸或其酸酐,可列舉:丙烯酸、甲基丙烯酸、順丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸酐、檸康酸、檸康酸酐、伊康酸、伊康酸酐或該等之衍生物之單環氧化合物與上述酸之酯化合物、分子內具有能夠與該等酸反應之基之聚合物與酸之反應生成物等。又,亦可使用該等之金屬鹽。該等中,可更佳地使用順丁烯二酸酐。又,該等之共聚物可各自單獨使用或混合2種以上使用。 為了製造改性聚烯烴系樹脂,例如可於使聚合物進行聚合之階段預先使該等改性單體共聚合,亦可使暫時聚合之聚合物與該等改性單體進行接枝共聚合。又,作為改性聚烯烴系樹脂,可單獨使用該等改性單體或併用複數種,且適宜地使用其含有率為0.1質量%以上、較佳為0.3質量%以上、進而較佳為0.5質量%以上且為5質量%以下、較佳為4.5質量%以下、進而較佳為4.0質量%以下之範圍者。其中,可適宜地使用經接枝改性者。 作為改性聚烯烴系樹脂之適宜之例,可列舉:順丁烯二酸酐改性聚丙烯樹脂、順丁烯二酸酐改性聚乙烯樹脂、順丁烯二酸酐乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物等。 被覆部I之厚度就成形性之觀點而言,較佳為10 μm~500 μm,其中尤佳為20 μm以上或300 μm以下,其中尤佳為30 μm以上或150 μm以下。 <被覆部II> 如上所述,本黏著片材積層體可採用於黏著材層之正面及背面之一側以可剝離之方式積層被覆部I,並且於與該被覆部I為相反側、即黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側以可剝離之方式積層被覆部II而成之構成。由此,藉由在黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側以可剝離之方式積層被覆部II,可提高操作性。但亦可採用不積層被覆部II之構成。 只要被覆部II為以可剝離之方式積層於黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側而成者,則其材料及構成並無特別限定。 被覆部II例如可為與上述被覆部I相同之積層構成及材料,此時,可為與上述被覆部I相同之厚度,亦可為不同之厚度。 若被覆部II為與被覆部I相同之積層構成及材料,則可防止於加熱本黏著片材積層體時等產生翹曲。 被覆部II亦可採用構成與被覆部I相同,但於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)、於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)、該等之比率(E'(MB)/E'(MA))、剝離力F(C)、剝離力F(D)等與被覆部I不同者。 進而,被覆部II亦可為與上述被覆部I不同之積層構成及材料。 被覆部II亦可使用例如通常使用之離型膜(亦稱為「剝離膜」)。具體而言,可列舉如於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MC)為2.0×109 ~1.0×1011 Pa之材料,例如可使用雙軸延伸聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯(PET)膜等。 [被覆部I] 作為上述被覆部I之構成例,對以為於共聚合聚酯膜之單面設置有塗佈層之塗佈膜,且於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'為1.5×109 Pa以下為特徵之塗佈膜(稱為「本塗佈膜」)進行說明。 若使用本塗佈膜,則藉由例如於將上述黏著片材積層體加熱後,將模具壓抵於設置有具有離型性之塗佈層之塗佈膜進行成型,而可於黏著片材表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。又,由於塗佈膜於常態下可維持形狀保持性,故而操作較容易,不僅如此,由於其並未過硬,因此可抑制於黏著片材形成非意圖需要之凹凸。 <共聚合聚酯膜> 構成本塗佈膜之共聚合聚酯膜可為單層構成,亦可為積層構成,例如除了2層、3層構成以外,只要不超過本發明之主旨,則亦可為4層或4層以上之多層,並無特別限定。又,例如於採用3層構成(表層/中間層/表層)之情形時,亦可將其表層或中間層之任意1層、或2層以上之層設為共聚合聚酯成分,且將其餘層設為不含共聚合成分之聚酯成分而構成。 又,共聚合聚酯膜係指將藉由擠出法擠出之熔融聚酯片材冷卻後,視需要加以延伸而成之膜。 作為共聚合聚酯之二羧酸成分,較佳為對苯二甲酸,除此以外,亦可含有草酸、丙二酸、丁二酸、己二酸、壬二酸、癸二酸、鄰苯二甲酸、間苯二甲酸、萘二甲酸、二苯醚二羧酸、環己烷二羧酸等公知之二羧酸之一種以上作為共聚合成分。又,作為二醇成分,較佳為乙二醇,除此以外,亦可含有丙二醇、三亞甲基二醇、四亞甲基二醇、六亞甲基二醇、1,4-環己烷二甲醇、二乙二醇、三乙二醇、聚伸烷基二醇、新戊二醇等公知之二醇之一種以上作為共聚合成分。 其中,更佳為使作為二羧酸成分之鄰苯二甲酸、間苯二甲酸、作為二醇成分之1,4-環己烷二甲醇、1,4-丁二醇、二乙二醇等任意地共聚合而成之共聚合聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯。 共聚合成分之含量較佳為1 mol%以上且50 mol%以下,更佳為3 mol%以上或40 mol%以下,進而較佳為4 mol%以上或30 mol%以下。藉由共聚合成分之含量為1 mol%以上,於使其與黏著片材積層時,可於黏著片材表面形成凹形狀、凸形狀、或凹凸形狀。另一方面,藉由為50 mol%以下,不僅具有充分之尺寸穩定性,而且可充分抑制加工時之褶皺之產生。 共聚合聚酯膜之熔點較佳為以成為較佳為260℃以下、更佳為200~255℃之範圍之方式設計。藉由上述熔點為260℃以下,於延伸後之熱處理步驟中,即使為低於共聚合聚酯膜之熔點之溫度之熱處理,亦可獲得充分之強度。 就提高膜作業性之方面而言,較理想為於共聚合聚酯膜中含有粒子。作為粒子,可列舉:碳酸鈣、碳酸鎂、硫酸鈣、硫酸鋇、磷酸鋰、磷酸鎂、磷酸鈣、氟化鋰、氧化鋁、氧化矽、高嶺土等無機粒子;丙烯酸系樹脂、胍胺樹脂等有機粒子;將觸媒殘差粒子化而成之析出粒子,但並不限定於該等。該等粒子之粒徑或共聚合聚酯膜中之含量可根據目的而適當決定。所含有之粒子可為單成分,又,亦可同時使用2種成分以上。又,亦可適當添加各種穩定劑、潤滑劑、防靜電劑等。 共聚合聚酯膜中所含之粒子之平均粒徑較佳為0.1~5.0 μm。於上述粒子之平均粒徑未達0.1 μm之情形時,存在膜之滑動性變得不充分,而作業性降低之情形。另一方面,於上述粒子之平均粒徑超過5.0 μm之情形時,存在膜表面之平滑性受損之情形。 共聚合聚酯膜中所含之粒子之含量較佳為0.01~0.3重量%。於上述粒子之含量未達0.01重量%之情形時,存在膜之滑動性變得不充分,而作業性降低之情形。另一方面,於上述粒子之含量超過0.3重量%之情形時,存在膜表面之平滑性受損之情形。 作為於共聚合聚酯膜中添加粒子之方法,並無特別限定,可採用公知之方法。例如,可於製造聚酯之任意階段添加,較佳為於酯化之階段、或亦可於酯交換反應結束後縮聚反應開始前之階段以分散於乙二醇等中之漿料之形式添加而進行縮聚反應。又,可藉由使用附排氣孔之混練擠出機將分散於乙二醇或水等中之粒子之漿料與聚酯原料摻合之方法、或使用混練擠出機將經乾燥之粒子與聚酯原料摻合之方法、於聚酯製造步驟系統中使粒子析出之方法等進行。 共聚合聚酯之極限黏度通常為0.40~1.10 dl/g,較佳為0.45~0.90 dl/g,進而較佳為0.50~0.80 dl/g。若極限黏度未達0.40 dl/g,則有膜之機械強度變弱之傾向,於極限黏度超過1.10 dl/g之情形時,存在熔融黏度變高,而會對擠出機過度地施加負荷之情形。 繼而,對共聚合聚酯膜之製造例進行具體說明,但並不受以下之製造例任何限定。 較佳為如下方法:首先,使用先前所述之共聚合聚酯原料,藉由冷卻輥將從模具擠出之熔融片材冷卻固化而獲得未延伸片材。於該情形時,為了提高片材之平面性,必須提高片材與旋轉冷卻轉筒之密接性,可較佳地採用靜電施加密接法及/或液體塗佈密接法。 繼而,較佳為將所獲得之未延伸片材至少沿單軸方向延伸,更佳為沿雙軸方向延伸之雙軸延伸。例如,作為雙軸延伸,於逐次雙軸延伸之情形時,藉由輥或拉輻方式之延伸機使上述未延伸片材於一個方向上沿機械方向延伸。延伸溫度通常為70~120℃,較佳為75~110℃,延伸倍率通常為2.5~7.0倍,較佳為3.0~6.0倍。其次,沿與第一階段之延伸方向(機械方向)垂直之方向延伸。延伸溫度通常為70~170℃,延伸倍率通常為3.0~7.0倍,較佳為3.5~6.0倍。然後,繼續於150~270℃之溫度下,於拉伸下或30%以內之鬆弛下進行熱處理,而獲得雙軸配向膜。於上述雙軸延伸中,亦可採用將一個方向之延伸進行2階段以上之方法。於該情形時,較佳為以兩個方向之延伸倍率最終分別成為上述範圍之方式而進行。 又,關於共聚合聚酯膜之製造,亦可採用同時雙軸延伸。同時雙軸延伸係於通常70~120℃、較佳為75~110℃下將上述未延伸片材於溫度經控制之狀態下沿機械方向及寬度方向同時延伸並使其配向之方法。作為延伸倍率,以面積倍率計較佳為4~50倍,更佳為7~35倍,進而較佳為10~25倍。然後,繼續於150~250℃之溫度下,於拉伸下或30%以內之鬆弛下進行熱處理,而獲得雙軸延伸膜。關於採用上述延伸方式之同時雙軸延伸裝置,可採用螺旋方式、縮放儀方式、線型驅動方式等自先前起公知之延伸方式。 (塗佈層) 於本塗佈膜中,重要的是於共聚合聚酯膜之至少單面設置塗佈層。作為塗佈層,並無特別限定,可具體地列舉離型層、防靜電層、低聚物密封層、易接著層、底塗層等。其中,就製造與黏著片材積層而成之黏著片材積層體之方面而言,更佳為離型層。又,亦可將如上所述之功能層組合2種以上。 作為構成塗佈膜之塗佈層之具體例,以下對離型層進行說明。 具體而言,離型層所使用之樹脂之種類可列舉硬化型聚矽氧樹脂、氟系樹脂、聚烯烴系樹脂等,其中較佳為硬化型聚矽氧樹脂。可為硬化型聚矽氧樹脂,亦可為以硬化型聚矽氧樹脂作為主成分之類型,於無損及本發明之主旨之範圍內,亦可使用藉由與胺基甲酸酯樹脂、環氧樹脂、醇酸樹脂等有機樹脂之接枝聚合等獲得之改性聚矽氧型等。 作為硬化型聚矽氧樹脂之種類,可使用加成型、縮合型、紫外線硬化型、電子束硬化型、無溶劑型等任一硬化反應型。若列舉具體例,則可例示:信越化學工業股份有限公司製造之KS-774、KS-775、KS-778、KS-779H、KS-847H、KS-856、X-62-2422、X-62-2461、X-62-1387、X-62-5039、X-62-5040、KNS-3051、X-62-1496、KNS320A、KNS316、X-62-1574A/B、X-62-7052、X-62-7028A/B、X-62-7619、X-62-7213;Momentive Performance Materials製造之YSR-3022、TPR-6700、TPR-6720、TPR-6721、TPR6500、TPR6501、UV9300、UV9425、XS56-A2775、XS56-A2982、UV9430、TPR6600、TPR6604、TPR6605;Dow Corning Toray股份有限公司製造之SRX357、SRX211、SD7220、SD7292、LTC750A、LTC760A、LTC303E、SP7259、BY24-468C、SP7248S、BY24-452、DKQ3-202、DKQ3-203、DKQ3-204、DKQ3-205、DKQ3-210等。進而,為了調整離型層之剝離性等,亦可併用剝離控制劑。 於共聚合聚酯膜上形成離型層時之硬化條件並無特別限定。於藉由離線塗佈設置離型層之情形時,通常宜於120~200℃下3~40秒、較佳為於100~180℃下3~40秒為標準進行熱處理。又,亦可視需要而併用熱處理與紫外線照射等活性能量線照射。再者,作為用於藉由活性能量線照射進行之硬化之能量源,可使用自先前起公知之裝置、能量源。離型層之塗敷量(乾燥後)就塗敷性之方面而言,通常為0.005~1 g/m2 之範圍,較佳為0.005~0.5 g/m2 之範圍,進而較佳為0.01~0.2 g/m2 之範圍。於塗敷量(乾燥後)未達0.005 g/m2 之情形時,存在就塗敷性之方面而言缺乏穩定性,而難以獲得均勻之塗膜之情形。另一方面,於超過1 g/m2 而較厚地塗佈之情形時,存在離型層本身之塗膜密接性、硬化性等降低之情形。 作為於共聚合聚酯膜設置離型層之方法,可使用反向凹版塗佈、直接凹版塗佈、輥式塗佈、模嘴塗佈、棒式塗佈、淋幕式塗佈等先前公知之塗敷方式。關於塗敷方式,於「塗佈方式」(槙書店 原崎勇次著,1979年發行)中有記載例。 又,為了於共聚合聚酯膜設置塗佈層,亦可預先對其實施電暈處理、電漿處理、紫外線照射處理等表面處理。 (塗佈膜) 本塗佈膜之厚度通常為9 μm~250 μm,較佳為12 μm~125 μm,進而較佳為25 μm~75 μm。 於上述厚度未達9 μm之情形時,存在膜張力變得不充分,而產生於切條時容易產生褶皺等異常之情形。另一方面,若超過250 μm,則存在例如對具有曲面形狀之成形品之追隨性變得不充分之情形。 本塗佈膜於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'為1.5×109 Pa以下,較佳為1.0×109 Pa以下。藉由上述儲存彈性模數E'為1.5×109 Pa以下,於使其與黏著片材積層時,可於黏著片材表面形成凹形狀、凸形狀、或凹凸形狀。為了使100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'滿足上述範圍,可藉由調整共聚合聚酯膜所含之共聚合成分之種類及含量而滿足。 另一方面,作為下限,並無特別限定,較佳為1.0×107 Pa以上,更佳為1.0×108 Pa以上。 本塗佈膜於120℃下加熱5分鐘後之收縮率為3.0%以下,較佳為2.5%以下。藉由上述收縮率為3.0%以下,而具有充分之尺寸穩定性,故而於使其與黏著片材積層時,可於黏著片材表面形成凹形狀、凸形狀、或凹凸形狀。進而,可抑制加工時褶皺之產生,因此不會將褶皺轉印至黏著片材,而可製造具有充分之外觀之黏著片材。 其中,於120℃下加熱5分鐘後之機械方向(MD)之收縮率較佳為3.0%以下,較佳為2.5%以下。另一方面,作為下限,並無特別限定,較佳為0.1%以上,更佳為0.5%以上。 又,於120℃下加熱5分鐘後之與機械方向垂直之方向(TD)之收縮率較佳為1.0%以下,較佳為0.8%以下。另一方面,作為下限,較佳為-1.0%以上,更佳為-0.5%以上。 本塗佈膜就成形加工時防止由低聚物(環狀三聚物)對模具之附著引起之污染之觀點而言,較佳為熱處理(180℃、10分鐘)後低聚物從塗佈層表面之提取量為1.0×10-3 mg/cm2 以下,更佳為5.0×10-4 mg/cm2 以下。 於上述低聚物提取量超過該範圍之情形時,存在成形加工時由低聚物對模具之附著引起之污染變得嚴重之情形。作為一例,於多次連續加熱成形之加工中,因析出低聚物之沈積導致促進模具污染,故而控制加熱時之低聚物析出量變得重要。基於上述理由,上述低聚物提取量越少越佳。 [本黏著片材積層體之製造方法] 作為本黏著片材積層體之製造方法之一例,例如可列舉如下方法:以2片被覆部I或II夾持黏著劑組合物,使用貼合機而形成黏著材層。又,作為其他方法,可列舉將黏著劑組合物塗佈於被覆部I或II而形成黏著材層之方法。但並不限定於該製造方法。 作為塗佈黏著劑組合物之方法,例如可列舉逆輥塗佈、凹版塗佈、棒式塗佈、刮刀塗佈等先前公知之塗敷方式。 [本賦形黏著片材積層體] 可使用本黏著片材積層體,以如下方式製作於黏著材層表面形成有凹凸形狀之賦形黏著片材積層體1(稱為「本賦形黏著片材積層體1」)。 如圖3所示,本賦形黏著片材積層體1可製成具備如下所述構成者:其具備黏著材層2、以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層2之正面及背面之一側而成之被覆部I、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層2之正面及背面之另一側而成之被覆部II, 黏著材層2於正面及背面之一側表面2A具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著片材表面凹凸部2B」),且正面及背面之另一側表面2C為平坦面, 被覆部I密接於上述黏著片材2之正面及背面之一側表面2A,於正面及背面之一側表面3A具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被覆部表面凹凸部3B」),且於片材背面3C具備與上述黏著片材表面凹凸部2B相符、換言之形成嵌合之凹凸之凸部、凹部或凸凹部(稱為「保護片材背面凸凹部3D」), 被覆部II沿上述黏著片材2之正面及背面之另一側表面2C包含平坦面。 再者,正面及背面之另一側表面2C可如圖3所示般製成平坦面,又,正面及背面之另一側表面2C亦可以具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部之方式形成。 具備此種構成之本賦形黏著片材積層體1可如圖2所示,藉由利用將上述本黏著片材積層體進行加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形或輥壓成形,以一體方式對本黏著片材積層體賦形凹凸形狀而製造。 藉由以上述方式製造,可使黏著材層2之黏著片材表面凹凸部2B、被覆部I之保護片材表面凹凸部3B及保護片材背面凸凹部3D於同一部位各自對應而形成凹凸。 黏著材層2可用作例如用以將構成圖像顯示裝置之2個圖像顯示裝置構成構件(分別亦稱為「被黏著體」)貼合之雙面黏著片材。 即,上述黏著材層2中之黏著片材表面凹凸部2B可以與上述被黏著體之貼合面中之凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被黏著體表面凹凸部」)相符之方式形成,較佳為形成為同一輪廓形狀。藉此,可使本賦形黏著片材積層體1中之黏著片材表面凹凸部2B與作為被黏著體之圖像顯示裝置構成構件中之被黏著體表面凹凸部嵌合。 此處,作為上述圖像顯示裝置,例如可列舉:具備液晶顯示裝置(liquid crystal display,LCD)、有機EL(electroluminescence,電致發光)顯示裝置(OLED(organic light emitting diode,有機發光二極體))、電子紙、微機電系統(microelectromechanical system,MEMS)顯示器及電漿顯示器(PDP)等之智慧型手機、平板終端、行動電話、電視、遊戲機、個人電腦、汽車導航系統、ATM(automatic teller machine,自動櫃員機)、魚群探測儀等。但並不限定於該等。 此外,所謂作為被黏著體之圖像顯示裝置構成構件係構成該等圖像顯示裝置之構件,例如可列舉表面保護面板、觸控面板、圖像顯示面板等,本賦形黏著片材積層體1例如可用於將選自表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板中之任意2個被黏著體貼合。例如,可用於將表面保護面板與觸控面板、或觸控面板與圖像顯示面板貼合。但並不將被黏著體限定於該等。 <製造方法> 此處,對本賦形黏著片材積層體1之製造方法之詳細進行說明。 如上所述,可如圖2所示,藉由利用加熱上述本黏著片材積層體進行成形,以一體方式對本黏著片材積層體1賦形凹凸形狀而製造。 此時,作為成形加工方法,例如可列舉加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形、利用輥之賦形、利用積層之賦形等。其中,就成形性及加工性之觀點而言,尤佳為加壓成形。 對更詳細之具體例進行說明。 藉由加熱器預熱本黏著片材積層體,於加熱為特定溫度之階段將本黏著片材積層體搬送至加壓成形機,利用預先仿照與被黏著體之印刷階差形狀相當之凹凸形狀之模具進行加壓加工,同時加以冷卻,藉此可使模具形狀轉印至本黏著片材積層體之單面,而製造於單面賦形有凹凸之本賦形黏著片材積層體1。 此時,本黏著片材積層體之預熱較佳為加熱為黏著材層柔軟化之溫度,具體而言,較佳為加熱為70~120℃。 凹凸賦形所使用之模具之材質並無特別限定。例如可列舉聚矽氧樹脂或氟樹脂等樹脂系材料、不鏽鋼或鋁等金屬系材料等。其中,由於對被黏著體之凹凸賦形要求高精度之成形性,因此尤佳為能夠控制成形時之溫度之金屬系之模具。 又,加壓加工後之冷卻可於開模後進行冷卻,亦可預先將模具冷卻,於加壓之同時進行冷卻。 再者,於本發明中,加壓壓力、加壓時間等成形之條件並無特別指定,根據所成形之尺寸或形狀、所使用之材料等適當調整即可。 又,於成形加工後亦可使用湯姆生刀(Thomson blade)或旋切刀等加以切割。 [本賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法] 繼而,對具備具有黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,且於該黏著材之一面賦形凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」)而成之構成之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法的尤佳之形態進行說明。 與下文所述之本製造方法1及本製造方法2相關之發明提出一種可於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與本被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之黏著材層表面凹凸部、較佳為可連續地製造之新穎之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法。 作為本發明之實施形態之一例,提出一種新穎之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法(稱為「本製造方法1」),該賦形黏著片材積層體係具備具有黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,且於該黏著材之一面賦形凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」)而成之構成者,該製造方法之特徵在於:其係具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,並對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形,並且加以冷卻而製造賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,且對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之狀態下結束成形。 於本製造方法1中,進而提出一種上述新穎之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其於將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形時,使用經冷卻之模具進行成形。 根據本製造方法1,例如藉由將上述黏著片材積層體加熱後,被覆部I於特定之狀態下開始成形,且被覆部I於特定之狀態結束成形,而可於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。 進而,於將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形時,若使用經冷卻之模具進行成形,則可於成形之同時進行冷卻並且同時結束,故而可連續地進行上述製造方法。 <本製造方法1> 本製造方法1係本實施形態之一例之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法(稱為「本製造方法」)包括加熱下文所述之黏著片材積層體(加熱步驟)、將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形並且加以冷卻(成形、冷卻步驟)之步驟之製造方法。 本製造方法1只要包括上述加熱步驟及上述成形、冷卻步驟,則亦可包括其他步驟。例如可視需要包括熱處理步驟、搬送步驟、切條步驟、裁斷步驟等步驟。但並不限定於該等步驟。 (黏著片材積層體) 作為本製造方法1中之起始構件之黏著片材積層體具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I即可,亦可具備其他構件。例如,如圖1所示,可例示具備黏著材層、以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之一側而成之被覆部I、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側而成之被覆部II之黏著片材積層體。但是否具備被覆部II為任意,亦可採用不積層被覆部II之構成。 再者,關於黏著片材積層體之詳細情況係如上文所述。 (加熱步驟) 於本製造方法1中,較佳為加熱上述黏著片材積層體而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態。 若被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為上述範圍,則可使被覆部I變形為適於成形之程度,且可對黏著材層之表面精度良好地賦形所需之凹凸形狀。 就該觀點而言,較佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態,其中進而較佳為設為5.0×106 Pa以上或1.0×109 Pa以下之狀態,其中進而較佳為設為1.0×107 Pa以上或5.0×108 Pa以下之狀態。 據此,更佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為1.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa、或1.0×106 ~5.0×108 之狀態,其中,進而較佳為設為5.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa、或5.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa之狀態,最佳為設為1.0×107 ~1.0×109 Pa、或1.0×107 ~~5.0×108 之狀態。 此處,為了以加熱黏著片材積層體,被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)成為上述範圍之方式進行調整,可藉由根據構成被覆部I之組合物之成分或凝膠分率、重量平均分子量等調整加熱溫度而加以調整。但並不限定於該方法。 進而,進而更佳為加熱上述黏著片材積層體,而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(S)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態。 若將被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)調整為上述範圍,則可獲得如上所述之效果,除此以外,若黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(S)未達1.0×104 Pa,則可對黏著材層賦予充分之成形性。 就該觀點而言,較佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為上述範圍且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(S)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態,其中較佳為設為5.0×101 Pa以上或5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態,其中較佳為設為1.0×102 Pa以上或1.0×103 Pa以下之狀態。 據此,更佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而設為被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(M)為上述範圍且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(S)為5.0×101 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa、或為5.0×101 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態,其中進而較佳為設為1.0×102 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa、或1.0×102 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態,最佳為設為1.0×102 Pa以上且1.0×103 Pa以下之狀態。 此處,黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(S)可根據構成黏著材層之組合物之成分或凝膠分率、重量平均分子量等調整加熱溫度而加以調整。但並不限定於該方法。 進而,尤佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而使黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ之值成為1.0以上。再者,下文對該損耗正切tanδ進行說明。 若黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ之值為1.0以上,則具有能夠成形之程度之柔軟性,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,尤佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而使黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ之值成為1.0以上,其中進而較佳為使其成為1.5以上或20以下,進而,其中進而較佳為使其成為3.0以上或10以下。但上限並不限於此。 於本製造方法1中,較佳為加熱黏著片材積層體而使被覆部I之表面溫度成為70~180℃。 若被覆部I之表面溫度為70℃以上,則黏著材層充分軟化,且可使被覆部I能夠充分變形,若為180℃以下,則可抑制由熱收縮引起之褶皺之產生、或由熱引起之黏著材層之分解等弊端,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為加熱上述黏著片材積層體而使被覆部I之表面溫度成為70~180℃,其中更佳為使其成為75℃以上或150℃以下,其中更佳為使其成為80℃以上或120℃以下。 作為黏著片材積層體之加熱方法,例如可列舉:使黏著片材積層體存在於內部具備電熱加熱器等加熱體之上下之加熱板之間而從上下加熱之方法、或以加熱板直接夾持之方法、使用加熱輥之方法、將其浸漬於熱水中之方法等。但並不限定於該等方法。 (成形、冷卻步驟) 於本步驟中,如上所述將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形,於將黏著片材積層體成形之同時進行冷卻。即,直接將積層黏著材層及被覆部I而成為一體之狀態之黏著片材積層體成形。由此,利用模具將被覆部I成形,同時介隔該被覆部I亦將黏著材層成形。 於本步驟中,可於將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形後進行冷卻,又,亦可於成形之同時進行冷卻。例如藉由利用經冷卻之模具進行加壓,可同時進行成形與冷卻並且同時結束。藉此,可如下文所述般連續地實施本製造方法1。 作為成形方法,只要可以一體方式對黏著片材積層體賦形凹凸形狀,則並不特別限定成形方法。例如可列舉:加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形、利用輥進行之賦形、壓縮成形、利用積層進行之賦形等。其中,就成形性及加工性之觀點而言,尤佳為加壓成形。 模具之材質並無特別限定。例如可列舉聚矽氧樹脂或氟樹脂等樹脂系材料、不鏽鋼或鋁等金屬系材料等。其中,由於對被黏著體之凹凸賦形要求高精度之成形性,因此尤佳為能夠控制成形時之溫度之金屬系之模具。 模具之冷卻方法可採用通常進行之冷卻方法。例如可列舉水冷或利用壓縮空氣之冷卻方法。 對於模具,例如藉由如圖2所示,預先於開閉之一對模具中之至少一模具之內壁面設置特定之凹凸形狀,例如設置與黏著黏著材層之被黏著體之貼合面中的凹部、凸部或凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀,而可藉由使用該模具將黏著片材積層體進行加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形或輥壓成形,將上述凹凸形狀轉印至黏著片材積層體而賦形。 於本步驟中,較佳為如上所述,於黏著片材積層體中之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態下開始成形。 此處,所謂「開始成形」,例如於使用模具之成形之情形時,意指關閉模具,即開始利用模具擠壓黏著片材積層體。 若被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之範圍,則可使被覆部I變形為適於成形之程度,且可對黏著材層之表面精度良好地賦形所需之凹凸形狀。 就該觀點而言,較佳為於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態下開始黏著片材積層體之成形,其中更佳為於為5.0×106 Pa以上或1.0×109 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形,其中更佳為於為1.0×107 Pa以上或5.0×108 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形。 據此,更佳為於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa、或1.0×106 ~5.0×108 Pa之狀態下開始黏著片材積層體之成形,其中,進而較佳為於為5.0×106 ~1.0×109 Pa、或5.0×106 ~5.0×108 Pa之狀態下開始成形,最佳為於為1.0×107 ~1.0×109 Pa、或1.0×107 ~5.0×108 Pa之狀態下開始成形。 進而,更佳為於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態下開始黏著片材積層體之成形。 若於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為上述範圍之狀態下開始成形,則可獲得如上所述之效果,除此以外,若於黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態下開始成形,則可於黏著材層具有更充分之成形性之狀態下進行成形。 就該觀點而言,進而較佳為於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為上述範圍之狀態且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態下開始成形,其中進而較佳為於該G'(SS)為5.0×101 Pa以上或5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形,其中進而更佳為於為1.0×102 Pa以上或1.0×103 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形。 據此,更佳為於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為上述範圍之狀態且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為5.0×101 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa、或為5.0×101 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形,其中,進而較佳為於為1.0×102 Pa以上且未達1.0×104 Pa、或為1.0×102 Pa以上且5.0×103 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形,最佳為於為1.0×102 Pa以上且1.0×103 Pa以下之狀態下開始成形。 又,較佳為於上述被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形。 若該被覆部I之表面溫度為70℃以上,則黏著材層充分軟化,且可使被覆部I能夠充分變形,若為180℃以下,則可抑制由熱收縮引起之褶皺之產生、或由熱引起之黏著材層之分解等弊端,故而較佳。 因此,較佳為於被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,其中更佳為使其成為75℃以上或150℃以下,其中更佳為使其成為80℃以上或120℃以下。 另一方面,於本步驟中,較佳為於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之狀態下結束成形。 此處,所謂「結束成形」意指結束對黏著片材積層體施加成形壓力,若為模具成形,則意指打開模具。 若上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 Pa以上且1.0×1010 Pa以下之範圍,則成形後之形狀穩定性優異,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之狀態下結束成形,其中更佳為於為1.0×108 Pa以上或8.0×109 Pa以下之狀態下結束成形,其中更佳為於為1.0×109 Pa以上或5.0×109 Pa以下之狀態下結束成形。 據此,於本步驟中,更佳為於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為、5.0×107 ~8.0×109 Pa、或5.0×107 ~5.0×109 Pa之狀態下結束成形,其中,較佳為於為1.0×108 ~8.0×109 Pa、或1.0×108 ~5.0×109 Pa之狀態下結束成形,最佳為於為1.0×109 ~8.0×109 Pa、或1.0×109 ~5.0×109 Pa之狀態下結束成形。 進而,更佳為於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)處於上述範圍之狀態且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為1.0×104 Pa以上之狀態下結束成形。 若於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為上述範圍之狀態下結束成形,則可獲得如上所述之效果,除此以外,若於黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為1.0×104 Pa以上之狀態下結束成形,則所成形之黏著材層可維持形狀。 就該觀點而言,較佳為於上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)處於上述範圍之狀態且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為1.0×104 Pa以上之狀態下結束成形,其中,進而較佳為於黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為5.0×104 Pa以上或5.0×107 Pa以下之狀態下結束成形,其中進而較佳為於為1.0×104 Pa以上或1.0×107 Pa以下之狀態下結束成形。 又,較佳為於上述被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達50℃之狀態下結束成形。例如,於加壓成形之情形時,較佳為於表面溫度成為未達50℃之狀態下打開模具。 若被覆部I之表面溫度未達50℃,且被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之範圍,則可抑制成形結束後於取出成形體時發生變形、或伴隨被覆部I之熱收縮而產生翹曲,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為於被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達50℃之狀態下結束成形,其中較佳為於成為0℃以上或45℃以下之狀態下結束成形,其中較佳為於成為10℃以上或40℃以下之狀態下結束成形。 進而,較佳為上述成形開始時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)與上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)滿足以下之關係式(1)。 (1)・・E'(MF)/E'(MS)≧1.3 此處,若上述被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)與上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)滿足上述關係式(1),則於成形開始時軟至能夠成形之程度,且於成形結束後具有能夠維持所成形之形狀之程度之硬度,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為E'(MF)/E'(MS)≧1.3,其中進而較佳為100≧E'(MF)/E'(MS)或E'(MF)/E'(MS)≧3.0,其中尤佳為50≧E'(MF)/E'(MS)或E'(MF)/E'(MS)≧5.0。但E'(MF)/E'(MS)之上限並不限定於此。 又,較佳為上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)與上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)滿足以下之關係式(2)。 (2)・・E'(MF)/G'(SF)≦1.0×107 此處,若上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)與上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)滿足上述關係式(2),則所成形之黏著材層可維持形狀。 就該觀點而言,較佳為E'(MF)/G'(SF)≦1.0×107 ,其中進而較佳為1.0≦E'(MF)/G'(SF)或E'(MF)/G'(SF)≦5.0×106 ,其中進而較佳為1.0×101 ≦E'(MF)/G'(SF)或E'(MF)/G'(SF)≦1.0×106 。 雖然有所重複,但於本製造方法1中,可利用模具加壓成形,於開模後加以冷卻,亦可預先將模具冷卻,於加壓成形之同時進行冷卻。若如此預先將模具冷卻,於加壓成形之同時進行冷卻,則可同時結束成形與冷卻。藉此,可於結束成形及冷卻後立即將賦形黏著片材積層體搬送至下一步驟,故而可連續地製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 於在模具成形之同時進行冷卻之情形時,模具之表面溫度較佳為0~50℃。 若模具之表面溫度為50℃以下,則可於短時間內固定黏著片材積層體之形狀,所獲得之成形體精度良好,且可抑制伴隨成形後之冷卻過程中之熱收縮之翹曲,就該觀點而言較佳。 因此,模具之表面溫度較佳為0~50℃,其中進而較佳為10℃以上或40℃以下,其中較佳為15℃以上或30℃以下。 再者,加壓壓力、加壓時間等加壓成形之條件並無特別限定,根據所成形之尺寸或形狀、所使用之材料等適當調整即可。 (其他) 上述成形、冷卻步驟中獲得之賦形黏著片材積層體可直接捲取,又,亦可進行熱處理,又,亦可裁斷為特定之大小及形狀。 於裁斷時,例如可列舉使用湯姆生刀(Thomson blade)或旋切刀等進行裁斷之方法。 於本製造方法1中,較佳為連續製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 例如可將黏著片材積層體搬送至加熱單元、例如加熱器中,於該加熱單元中將搬送停止特定時間進行加熱,或一邊搬送一邊加熱後,將經加熱之黏著片材積層體搬送至成形單元、例如成形模具中,於該成形單元中,例如藉由經冷卻之模具進行加壓,於成形之同時進行冷卻,進而視需要搬送至下一單元中,而連續地製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 <本製造方法2> 作為本發明之實施形態之一例,提出一種賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法(稱為「本製造方法2」),該賦形黏著片材積層體係具備具有黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,且於該黏著材之一面賦形凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」)而成之構成者,該製造方法之特徵在於:其係對具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I之黏著片材積層體進行加熱,利用模具將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形而製造賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,且對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達60℃後從模具取出賦形黏著片材積層體。 根據本製造方法2,藉由對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達60℃後從模具取出賦形黏著片材積層體,而例如可於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。 本製造方法2係包括加熱下文所述之黏著片材積層體(加熱步驟)、將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形並且冷卻(成形、冷卻步驟)之步驟之製造方法。 本製造方法2只要包括上述加熱步驟及上述成形、冷卻步驟,則亦可包括其他步驟。例如可視需要包括熱處理步驟、搬送步驟、切條步驟、裁斷步驟等步驟。但並不限定於該等步驟。 (黏著片材積層體) 作為本製造方法2中之起始構件之黏著片材積層體具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I即可,亦可具備其他構件。例如,如圖1所示,可例示具備黏著材層、以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之一側而成之被覆部I、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側而成之被覆部II之黏著片材積層體。但是否具備被覆部II為任意,亦可採用不積層被覆部II之構成。 再者,關於黏著片材積層體之詳細情況係如上文所述。 (加熱步驟) 於本步驟中,加熱上述黏著片材積層體而使被覆部I之表面溫度成為70~180℃。 若被覆部I之表面溫度為70℃以上,則黏著材層充分軟化,且可使被覆部I能夠充分變形,若為180℃以下,則可抑制由熱收縮引起之褶皺之產生、或由熱引起之黏著材層之分解等弊端,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為加熱上述黏著片材積層體而使被覆部I之表面溫度成為70~180℃,其中更佳為使其成為75℃以上或150℃以下,其中更佳為使其成為80℃以上或120℃以下。 據此,更佳為加熱上述黏著片材積層體而使被覆部I之表面溫度成為70~150℃、或70~120℃,其中,進而較佳為使其成為75~150℃、或75~120℃,最佳為使其成為80~150℃、或80~120℃。 作為黏著片材積層體之加熱方法,例如可列舉:使黏著片材積層體存在於內部具備電熱加熱器等加熱體之上下之加熱板之間而從上下加熱之方法、或以加熱板直接夾持之方法、使用加熱輥之方法、將其浸漬於熱水中之方法等。但並不限定於該等方法。 (成形、冷卻步驟) 於本步驟中,較佳為於如上述般將被覆部I之表面溫度加熱至70~180℃之狀態下開始黏著片材積層體之成形。即,較佳為直接將積層黏著材層及被覆部I而成為一體之狀態之黏著片材積層體進行成形。藉此,可於將被覆部I成形之同時,亦介隔該被覆部I而將黏著材層成形。 於本步驟中,可於將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形後進行冷卻,又,亦可於成形之同時進行冷卻。例如藉由利用經冷卻之模具進行加壓,可同時進行成形與冷卻並且同時結束。藉此,可如下文所述般連續地實施本製造方法2。 作為成形方法,只要可以一體方式對黏著片材積層體賦形凹凸形狀,則並不特別限定成形方法。例如可列舉:加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形、利用輥進行之賦形(輥壓成形)、壓縮成形、利用積層進行之賦形等。其中,就成形性及加工性之觀點而言,尤佳為加壓成形。 於使用模具進行成形之情形時,模具之材質並無特別限定。例如可列舉聚矽氧樹脂或氟樹脂等樹脂系材料、不鏽鋼或鋁等金屬系材料等。其中,由於對被黏著體之凹凸賦形要求高精度之成形性,因此尤佳為能夠控制成形時之溫度之金屬系之模具。 模具之冷卻方法可採用通常進行之冷卻方法。例如可列舉水冷或利用壓縮空氣之冷卻方法。 對於模具,例如藉由如圖2所示,預先於開閉之一對模具中之至少一模具之內壁面設置特定之凹凸形狀,例如設置與黏著黏著材層之被黏著體之貼合面中的凹部、凸部或凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀,而可藉由使用該模具將黏著片材積層體進行加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形或輥壓成形,將上述凹凸形狀轉印至黏著片材積層體而賦形。 如上所述,較佳為於上述被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形。若該被覆部I之表面溫度為70℃以上,則黏著材層充分軟化,且可使被覆部I能夠充分變形,若為180℃以下,則可抑制由熱收縮引起之褶皺之產生、或由熱引起之黏著材層之分解等弊端,故而較佳。 因此,較佳為於被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,其中更佳為使其成為75℃以上或150℃以下,其中更佳為使其成為80℃以上或120℃以下。 另一方面,於本步驟中,較佳為於上述被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達60℃之狀態下結束成形。例如,於加壓成形之情形時,較佳為於表面溫度成為未達60℃之狀態下打開模具。 此處,所謂「結束成形」意指結束對黏著片材積層體施加成形壓力,若為模具成形,則意指打開模具。 若被覆部I之表面溫度未達60℃,則可抑制成形結束後於取出成形體時發生變形、或伴隨被覆部I之熱收縮而產生翹曲,故而較佳。 就該觀點而言,較佳為於被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達60℃之狀態下結束成形,其中較佳為於成為0℃以上或50℃以下之狀態下結束成形,其中較佳為於成為10℃以上或40℃以下之狀態下結束成形。 雖然有所重複,但於本製造方法2中,可利用模具加壓成形,於開模後加以冷卻,亦可預先將模具冷卻,於加壓成形之同時進行冷卻。若如此預先將模具冷卻,於加壓成形之同時進行冷卻,則可同時結束成形與冷卻。藉此,可於結束成形及冷卻後立即將賦形黏著片材積層體搬送至下一步驟,故而可連續地製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 於在模具成形之同時進行冷卻之情形時,模具之表面溫度較佳為未達60℃。 若模具之表面溫度未達60℃,則可於短時間內固定黏著片材積層體之形狀,所獲得之成形體精度良好,且可抑制伴隨成形後之冷卻過程中之熱收縮之翹曲,就該觀點而言較佳。 因此,模具之表面溫度較佳為未達60℃,其中進而較佳為0℃以上或50℃以下,其中進而較佳為10℃以上或40℃以下。 又,成形開始時與成形結束時之被覆部I之表面溫度之差較佳為10~100℃,其中進而較佳為20℃以上或90℃以下。藉由上述被覆部I之表面溫度之差為10~100℃,例如於將上述凹凸形狀轉印至黏著片材積層體而賦形時,可於結束成形及冷卻後立即將賦形黏著片材積層體搬送至下一步驟,故而可連續地製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 再者,加壓壓力、加壓時間等加壓成形之條件並無特別限定,根據所成形之尺寸或形狀、所使用之材料等適當調整即可。 (其他) 上述成形、冷卻步驟中獲得之賦形黏著片材積層體可直接捲取,又,亦可進行熱處理,又,亦可裁斷為特定之大小及形狀。 於裁斷時,例如可列舉使用湯姆生刀(Thomson blade)或旋切刀等進行裁斷之方法。 於本製造方法2中,較佳為連續製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 例如可將黏著片材積層體搬送至加熱單元、例如加熱器中,於該加熱單元中將搬送停止特定時間進行加熱,或一邊搬送一邊加熱後,將經加熱之黏著片材積層體搬送至成形單元、例如成形模具中,於該成形單元中,例如藉由經冷卻之模具進行加壓,於成形之同時進行冷卻,進而視需要搬送至下一單元中,而連續地製造賦形黏著片材積層體。 <用途> 此處,對本賦形黏著片材積層體1之利用用途之一例進行說明。 近年,隨著行動電話或智慧型手機、平板終端等通用化,因使用者失誤將其掉落等導致圖像顯示部受損之事例偏多。尤其是於圖像顯示裝置為觸控面板方式之情形時,不僅因破損而變得難以觀察到顯示,而且因物理障礙或水之滲入等導致觸控面板操作本身無法進行、或成為故障之原因。因此,存在進行僅更換圖像顯示部之維修、即修理之情形。 於圖像顯示裝置之維修中,於安裝新圖像顯示部時亦使用黏著片材。通常,維修較多情況下係修理作業者以手工作業進行,修理作業者必須熟練。即,若非熟練者,則於介隔黏著片材安裝圖像顯示部時,空氣會進入內部,或會擠出黏著材。 與此相對,若使用本賦形黏著片材積層體1,則由於可預先賦予精度較高之階差形狀等,因此例如藉由預先對黏著材層賦予與圖像顯示裝置之機種相對應之階差形狀,而可大幅簡化維修作業,無需修理作業者之熟練亦可實施。如上所述,本發明之黏著片材積層體可有用地用於圖像顯示裝置之維修。 <語句之說明> 於本說明書中,於表述為「X~Y」(X、Y為任意之數字)之情形時,若無特別說明,則表示「X以上且Y以下」之含義,並且亦包含「較佳為大於X」或「較佳為小於Y」之含義。 又,於表述為「X以上」(X為任意之數字)或「Y以下」(Y為任意之數字)之情形時,亦包含「較佳為大於X」或「較佳為未達Y」之含義。 於本發明中,片材與膜之邊界並不確定,於本發明中不必於文語上將兩者加以區別,故而於本發明中,稱為「膜」之情形時亦包含「片材」,稱為「片材」之情形時亦包含「膜」。 實施例 以下,藉由實施例進一步具體地說明本發明。但本發明並不限定於實施例。 [實施例、比較例之群1] <被覆部1-I> 實施例1-1~1-3及比較例1-1(以下亦統稱為「實施例、比較例之群1」)中之黏著片材積層體之被覆部1-I使用以下之被覆部1-A~被覆部1-D。將各自之儲存彈性模數之值示於表1。 ・被覆部1-A:於雙軸延伸間苯二甲酸共聚合PET膜(厚度:75 μm)之單面積層包含聚矽氧系化合物之離型層(厚度:2 μm)而成之膜。 ・被覆部1-B:於包含4-甲基戊烯-1之未延伸之聚烯烴膜(厚度:50 μm)之單面積層包含改性聚烯烴之離型層(厚度:38 μm)而成之膜。 ・被覆部1-C:包含含有未延伸聚丙烯之聚烯烴膜(厚度:70 μm)之膜。 ・被覆部1-D:於雙軸延伸均聚PET膜(厚度:75 μm)之單面積層包含聚矽氧系化合物之離型層(厚度:2 μm)而成之膜。 <實施例1-1> (雙面黏著片材之製作) 將作為(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(1-a)之數量平均分子量2400之聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯巨單體(Tg:105℃)15質量份(18 mol%)、丙烯酸丁酯(Tg:-55℃)81質量份(75 mol%)及丙烯酸(Tg:106℃)4質量份(7 mol%)無規共聚合而成之丙烯酸系共聚物(1-a-1)(重量平均分子量23萬)1 kg、作為交聯劑(1-b)之甘油二甲基丙烯酸酯(日油公司製造,製品名:GMR)(1-b-1)90 g、及作為光聚合起始劑(1-c)之2,4,6-三甲基二苯甲酮與4-甲基二苯甲酮之混合物(Lanberti公司製造,製品名:Esacure TZT)(1-c-1)15 g均勻地混合,而製作黏著材層所使用之樹脂組合物1-1。所獲得之樹脂組合物之玻璃轉移溫度為-5℃。 利用經離型處理之PET膜(三菱樹脂公司製造,製品名:Diafoil MRV-V06,厚度:100 μm)與被覆部1-A之2片將所獲得之樹脂組合物1-1夾持,使用貼合機以樹脂組合物1-1之厚度成為100 μm之方式賦形為片材狀,而製作黏著片材積層體1-1。再者,以與樹脂組合物1-1相接之方式配置被覆部1-A之離型層側。 所獲得之黏著片材積層體1-1係使用真空壓空成形機(第一實業公司製造,FKS-0632-20形),藉由以下之製程進行熱成形,而製作賦形黏著片材積層體1-1。 即,藉由預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體1-1之表面達到100℃,繼而使用冷卻為25℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體1-1。 <實施例1-2> 使用被覆部1-B代替上述被覆部1-A,除此以外,以與實施例1-1同樣之方式,製作黏著片材積層體1-2及賦形黏著片材積層體1-2。 <實施例1-3> 使用被覆部1-C代替上述被覆部1-A,除此以外,以與實施例1-1同樣之方式,製作黏著片材積層體1-3及賦形黏著片材積層體1-3。 <比較例1-1> 使用被覆部1-D代替上述被覆部1-A,除此以外,以與實施例1-1同樣之方式,製作黏著片材積層體1-4及賦形黏著片材積層體1-4。 <測定及評價方法> 對實施例1-1~1-3、比較例1-1中獲得之樣品之各種物性值之測定方法及評價方法進行說明。 (被覆部之彈性模數) 將實施例、比較例之群1所使用之被覆部1-A~1-D分別切成長度50 mm、寬度4 mm,使用動態黏彈性裝置(IT Meter and Control股份有限公司之DVA-200),以夾頭間距為25 mm並且施加1%之形變而進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。將所獲得之資料的於100℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MA),將於30℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MB)。 (黏著材層之彈性模數) 將實施例、比較例之群1中獲得之黏著材層重疊而積層為1 mm之厚度,使用流變儀(Thermo Fisher Scientific公司製造之MARSII)進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 將所獲得之資料的於100℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SA),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SA),將於30℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SB),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SB),將各溫度條件下之G''/G'之值設為各黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SA,SB)。 (凝膠分率) 黏著材層之凝膠分率係分別採集約0.05 g之實施例、比較例之群1中獲得之黏著材層,藉由預先測定質量(X)之SUS絲網(#200)包裹為袋狀,將袋口彎折封閉,測定該包裹之質量(Y)後,將其浸漬於100 ml之乙酸乙酯中,於23℃下在暗處保管24小時後,取出包裹於70℃下加熱4.5小時而使所附著之乙酸乙酯蒸發,測定經乾燥之包裹之質量(Z),將所求出之質量代入下述式中而求出。 凝膠分率[%]=[(Z-X)/(Y-X)]×100 (成形性) 為了確認成形性,而使用以下所說明之模具實施實施例、比較例之群1之成形測試。即,如圖5所示,成形用之模具之上下一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之凸模具,上下另一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之鋁平板。 對於上述凸模具之成形面,如圖5所示,於中央設置縱187 mm、橫125 mm、高1 mm之凸部,進而,於該凸部之成形面內設置深度為25 μm、50 μm、75 μm、100 μm之4個俯視長方形狀(縱89 mm、橫58 mm)之成形凹部。 將藉由實施例、比較例之群1所記載之方法獲得之賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材積層體之被覆部1-A~1-D剝離,分別使用掃描式白色干涉顯微鏡,以非接觸方式計測相當於印刷階差之凹部與相當於顯示器面之凸部之高度。 計測成形體之凸部(與凹部之邊界部)相對於模具之深度100 μm之高度h,將由下述計算式導出之轉印率為50%以上者評價為○,將未達50%者評價為×。 轉印率(%)=h(成形體高度)/100(模具深度)×100 (剝離力) 將實施例、比較例之群1中所製作之黏著片材積層體切成長度150 mm、寬度50 mm,對被覆部1-A~1-D與黏著材層之界面以試驗速度300 mm/min進行180°剝離試驗。 將30℃環境下之剝離力設為F(C),將於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃後之剝離力設為F(D),以所獲得之值分別作為被覆部1-A~1-D之剝離力。 將實施例及比較例中獲得之黏著片材積層體1-1~1-4及賦形黏著片材積層體1-1~1-4之評價結果示於表1。 [表1] 根據表1及圖4之結果以及至此為止之試驗結果,確認到如實施例1-1至實施例1-3所示,藉由將於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa且於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之被覆部積層於黏著材層進行成形,而可對黏著材層高精度地賦形凹凸形狀。 另一方面,如比較例1-1所示,於使用通常廣泛使用之雙軸延伸均聚PET膜作為離型膜之情形時,即使於高溫範圍內被覆部之儲存彈性模數亦超過2.0×109 Pa,故而即使進行熱成形亦無法對黏著材層賦形充分之凹凸。 由此得知,藉由將於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa且於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之被覆部積層於黏著材層進行成形,而可良好地獲得賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材。 亦得知:藉由使用進而較佳為滿足黏著材層於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(A)為1.0以上之條件且滿足黏著材層於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(B)未達1.0之條件之黏著片材積層體,而可達成更高精度之賦形。 因此確認,藉由使用如上述之黏著片材積層體,精度良好地賦形相當於成為被黏著體之圖像顯示裝置之印刷階差的凹凸,而可製造與被黏著體之間無間隙、且即使於如印刷部為窄邊緣設計之被黏著體中黏著材亦可不溢出而良好地密接貼合之圖像顯示裝置用賦形黏著片材積層體。 又,就剝離力而言,測定剝離力F(D)時之加熱冷卻條件、即於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃之條件係製造賦形黏著片材積層體時之典型之加熱冷卻條件。由於上述實施例中剝離力F(C)與剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值均為0.1 N/cm以下,故而確認賦形黏著片材積層體中之被覆部1-A~1-D之剝離力與黏著片材積層體中之被覆部1-A~1-D之剝離力相同。 [實施例、比較例之群2] <被覆部2-I> 作為實施例2-1~2-4及比較例2-1(以下亦統稱為「實施例、比較例之群2」)中之黏著片材積層體之被覆部I,使用於雙軸延伸間苯二甲酸共聚合PET膜(厚度:75 μm)之單面積層包含聚矽氧系化合物之離型層(厚度:2 μm)而成之膜。將各自之儲存彈性模數之值示於表2。 <實施例2-1> (雙面黏著片材之製作) 將作為(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(2-a)之數量平均分子量2400之聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯巨單體(Tg:105℃)15質量份(18 mol%)、丙烯酸丁酯(Tg:-55℃)81質量份(75 mol%)及丙烯酸(Tg:106℃)4質量份(7 mol%)無規共聚合而成之丙烯酸系共聚物(2-a-1)(重量平均分子量23萬)1 kg、作為交聯劑(2-b)之甘油二甲基丙烯酸酯(日油公司製造,製品名:GMR)(2-b-1)90 g、及作為光聚合起始劑(2-c)之2,4,6-三甲基二苯甲酮與4-甲基二苯甲酮之混合物(Lanberti公司製造,製品名:Esacure TZT)(2-c-1)15 g均勻地混合,而製作黏著材層所使用之樹脂組合物2-1。所獲得之樹脂組合物之玻璃轉移溫度為-5℃。 利用經離型處理之PET膜(三菱樹脂公司製造,製品名:Diafoil MRV-V06,厚度:100 μm)與被覆部2-I之2片將所獲得之樹脂組合物2-1夾持,使用貼合機以樹脂組合物2-1之厚度成為100 μm之方式賦形為片材狀,而製作黏著片材積層體2-1。再者,以與樹脂組合物2-1相接之方式配置被覆部2-I之離型層側。 所獲得之黏著片材積層體2-1係使用真空壓空成形機(第一實業公司製造,FKS-0632-20形)及成形用模具,藉由以下之製程進行熱成形,而製作賦形黏著片材積層體2-1。 關於成形用之模具,如圖5所示,上下一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之凸模具,上下另一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之鋁平板。對於上述凸模具之成形面,如圖5所示,於中央設置縱187 mm、橫125 mm、高1 mm之凸部,進而,於該凸部之成形面內設置深度為25 μm、50 μm、75 μm、100 μm之4個俯視長方形狀(縱89 mm、橫58 mm)之成形凹部。 藉由預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體2-1之被覆部2-I之表面達到100℃並進行成形。即,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為2.1×108 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為2.9×102 Pa之狀態下,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為2.8×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為6.1×104 Pa之狀態下打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體2-1。 再者,上述成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)相對於上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)之比率E'(MF)/E'(MS)為13.3。 又,上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)相對於上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)之比率E'(MF)/G'(SF)為4.6×104 。 又,成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為4.8,成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)為0.6。 <實施例2-2> 對於實施例2-1所使用之黏著片材積層體2-1,使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體2-2之被覆部2-I之表面達到110℃並進行成形。即,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.3×108 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為9.6×101 Pa之狀態下,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為2.8×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為6.1×104 Pa之狀態下打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體2-2。 <實施例2-3> 對於實施例2-1所使用之黏著片材積層體2-1,使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體2-3之被覆部2-I之表面達到90℃並進行成形。即,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為3.5×108 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為8.9×102 Pa之狀態下,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為2.8×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為6.1×104 Pa之狀態下打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體2-3。 再者,上述成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)相對於上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)之比率E'(MF)/E'(MS)為8.0。 又,上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)相對於上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)之比率E'(MF)/G'(SF)為4.6×104 。 又,成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為2.7,成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)為0.6。 <實施例2-4> 對於實施例2-1所使用之黏著片材積層體2-1,使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體2-4之被覆部2-I之表面達到70℃並進行成形。即,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.9×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為6.4×103 Pa之狀態下,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為25℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為2.8×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為6.1×104 Pa之狀態下打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體2-4。 再者,上述成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)相對於上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)之比率E'(MF)/E'(MS)為1.4。 又,上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)相對於上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)之比率E'(MF)/G'(SF)為4.6×104 。 又,成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為1.4,成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)為0.6。 <比較例2-1> 對於實施例2-1所使用之黏著片材積層體2-1,使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體2-5之被覆部2-I之表面達到60℃並進行成形。即,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為2.4×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)為1.3×104 Pa之狀態下,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為25℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為2.8×109 Pa且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為6.1×104 Pa之狀態下打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體2-5。 再者,上述成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)相對於上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)之比率E'(MF)/E'(MS)為1.2。 又,上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)相對於上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)之比率E'(MF)/G'(SF)為4.6×104 。 又,成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為1.1,成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)為0.6。 再者,上述成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)相對於上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)之比率E'(MF)/E'(MS)為8.0。 又,上述成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)相對於上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)之比率E'(MF)/G'(SF)為9.7×103 。 又,成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為0.6,成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)為0.6。 <測定及評價方法> 對實施例2-1~2-4、比較例2-1中獲得之樣品之各種物性值之測定方法及評價方法進行說明。 (被覆部之彈性模數) 被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)及E'(MF)係切成長度50 mm、寬度4 mm,使用動態黏彈性裝置(IT Meter and Control股份有限公司之DVA-200),以夾頭間距為25 mm並且施加1%之形變而進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 將實施例及比較例之各成形開始時溫度下之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MS),將各成形結束時溫度下之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MF)。 再者,於實施例2-1中,由於成形開始時溫度為100℃,因此實施例2-1之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)係於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)。 又,由於實施例、比較例之群2中成形結束時溫度均為30℃,因此關於任一實施例、比較例之群2,該E'(MF)均與30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)相同。 (黏著材層之彈性模數) 將實施例、比較例之群2中獲得之黏著材層重疊而積層為1 mm之厚度,使用流變儀(Thermo Fisher Scientific公司製造之MARSII)進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 於所獲得之資料中,將100℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SA),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SA),將30℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SB),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SB),將各溫度條件下之G''/G'之值設為各黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SA,SB)。 另一方面,關於黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)及G'(SB),將實施例、比較例之群2中獲得之黏著材層重疊而積層為1 mm之厚度,使用流變儀(Thermo Fisher Scientific公司製造之MARSII)進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 於所獲得之資料中,將實施例、比較例之群2之各成形開始時溫度下的儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SS),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SS),將各成形結束時溫度下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SF),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SF),進而,將各溫度條件下之G''/G'之值設為各黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS,SF)。 (凝膠分率) 關於黏著材層之凝膠分率,分別採集約0.05 g之實施例、比較例之群2中獲得之黏著材層,藉由預先測定質量(X)之SUS絲網(#200)包裹為袋狀,將袋口彎折封閉,測定該包裹之質量(Y)後,將其浸漬於100 ml之乙酸乙酯中,於23℃下在暗處保管24小時後,取出包裹於70℃下加熱4.5小時而使所附著之乙酸乙酯蒸發,測定經乾燥之包裹之質量(Z),將所求出之質量代入下述式中而求出。 凝膠分率[%]=[(Z-X)/(Y-X)]×100 (成形性) 將實施例、比較例之群2中獲得之賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材積層體之被覆部I剝離,分別使用掃描式白色干涉顯微鏡,以非接觸方式計測相當於印刷階差之凹部與相當於顯示器面之凸部之高度。 計測成形體之凸部(與凹部之邊界部)相對於模具之深度100 μm之高度h,將由下述計算式導出之轉印率為50%以上者評價為○,將未達50%者評價為×。 轉印率(%)=h(成形體高度)/100(模具深度)×100 (剝離力) 將實施例、比較例之群2中所製作之黏著片材積層體切成長度150 mm、寬度50 mm,對被覆部2-I與黏著材層之界面以試驗速度300 mm/min進行180°剝離試驗。 將30℃環境下之剝離力設為F(C),將於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃後之剝離力設為F(D),以所獲得之值分別作為被覆部2-I之剝離力。 將實施例2-1~2-4及比較例2-1中獲得之賦形黏著片材積層體2-1~2-5之評價結果示於表2。 [表2] 根據表2及圖4之結果以及至此為止之試驗結果,確認到如實施例2-1至實施例2-4所示,藉由以成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)成為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之方式調整並進行成形,可對黏著材層高精度地賦形凹凸形狀。 另一方面,如比較例2-1所示,於成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)大於2.0×109 Pa之情形時,即使進行熱成形亦無法對黏著材層賦形充分之凹凸。 由此得知,藉由以成形開始時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa且成形結束時之被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)成為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之方式調整並進行成形,而可良好地獲得賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材。 亦得知:藉由以進而較佳為滿足成形開始時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SS)為1.0以上之條件且滿足成形結束時之黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SF)未達1.0之條件之方式調整並進行成形,而可達成更高精度之賦形。 因此確認,藉由使用如上述之黏著片材積層體,精度良好地賦形相當於成為被黏著體之圖像顯示裝置之印刷階差的凹凸,而可製造與被黏著體之間無間隙、且即使於如印刷部為窄邊緣設計之被黏著體中黏著材亦可不溢出而良好地密接貼合之圖像顯示裝置用賦形黏著片材積層體。 又,就剝離力而言,測定剝離力F(D)時之加熱冷卻條件、即於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃之條件係製造賦形黏著片材積層體時之典型之加熱冷卻條件。由於上述實施例中剝離力F(C)與剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值均為0.1 N/cm以下,因此確認剝離力於加熱前後幾乎無變化。 進而得知,藉由加熱黏著片材積層體,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部2-I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之狀態下結束成形,而可於黏著材層表面高精度地形成與被黏著體表面之凹凸部相符之凹凸形狀。 [實施例、比較例之群3] <被覆部3-I> 作為實施例3-1~3-3及比較例3-1~3-2(以下亦統稱為「實施例、比較例之群3」)中之黏著片材積層體之被覆部3-I,使用於雙軸延伸間苯二甲酸共聚合PET膜(厚度:75 μm)之單面積層包含聚矽氧系化合物之離型層(厚度:2 μm)而成之膜。將各自之儲存彈性模數之值示於表3。 <實施例3-1> (雙面黏著片材之製作) 將作為(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(3-a)之數量平均分子量2400之聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯巨單體(Tg:105℃)15質量份(18 mol%)、丙烯酸丁酯(Tg:-55℃)81質量份(75 mol%)及丙烯酸(Tg:106℃)4質量份(7 mol%)無規共聚合而成之丙烯酸系共聚物(3-a-1)(重量平均分子量23萬)1 kg、作為交聯劑(3-b)之甘油二甲基丙烯酸酯(日油公司製造,製品名:GMR)(3-b-1)90 g、及作為光聚合起始劑(3-c)之2,4,6-三甲基二苯甲酮與4-甲基二苯甲酮之混合物(Lanberti公司製造,製品名:Esacure TZT)(3-c-1)15 g均勻地混合,而製作黏著材層所使用之樹脂組合物3-1。所獲得之樹脂組合物之玻璃轉移溫度為-5℃。 利用經離型處理之PET膜(三菱樹脂公司製造,製品名:Diafoil MRV-V06,厚度:100 μm)與被覆部3-I之2片將所獲得之樹脂組合物3-1夾持,使用貼合機以樹脂組合物3-1之厚度成為100 μm之方式賦形為片材狀,而製作黏著片材積層體3-1。再者,以與樹脂組合物3-1相接之方式配置被覆部3-I之離型層側。 所獲得之黏著片材積層體3-1係使用真空壓空成形機(第一實業公司製造,FKS-0632-20形)及成形用模具,藉由以下之製程進行熱成形,而製作賦形黏著片材積層體3-1。 關於成形用之模具,如圖5所示,上下一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之凸模具,上下另一模具為長度270 mm、寬度170 mm、厚度40 mm之鋁平板。對於上述凸模具之成形面,如圖5所示,於中央設置縱187 mm、橫125 mm、高1 mm之凸部,進而,於該凸部之成形面內設置深度為25 μm、50 μm、75 μm、100 μm之4個俯視長方形狀(縱89 mm、橫58 mm)之成形凹部。 藉由預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體3-1之被覆部3-I之表面達到100℃,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,將該加熱狀態之黏著片材積層體3-1於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形後打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體3-1。 <實施例3-2> 使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,將實施例3-1中所使用之黏著片材積層體3-1加熱至黏著片材積層體3-2之被覆部3-I之表面達到70℃,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,將該加熱狀態之黏著片材積層體3-1於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形後打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體3-2。 <實施例3-3> 使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,將實施例3-1中所使用之黏著片材積層體3-1加熱至黏著片材積層體3-3之被覆部3-I之表面達到100℃,使用將模具表面溫度調整為50℃之成形用模具,將該加熱狀態之黏著片材積層體3-1於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形後打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體3-3。 <比較例3-1> 使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,將實施例3-1中所使用之黏著片材積層體3-1加熱至黏著片材積層體3-5之被覆部3-I之表面達到60℃,使用將模具表面溫度冷卻為30℃之成形用模具,將該加熱狀態之黏著片材積層體3-1於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形後打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體3-4。 <比較例3-2> 使用預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,將實施例3-1中所使用之黏著片材積層體3-1加熱至黏著片材積層體3-5之被覆部3-I之表面達到100℃,使用將模具表面溫度調整為80℃之成形用模具,將該加熱狀態之黏著片材積層體3-1於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形後打開模具,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體3-5。 <測定及評價方法> 對實施例3-1~3-3及比較例3-1~3-2中獲得之樣品之各種物性值之測定方法及評價方法進行說明。 (被覆部之彈性模數) 被覆部3-I之儲存彈性模數係切成長度50 mm、寬度4 mm,使用動態黏彈性裝置(IT Meter and Control股份有限公司之DVA-200),以夾頭間距為25 mm並且施加1%之形變而進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 於所獲得之資料中,將30℃下之被覆部3-I之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MB),將100℃下之被覆部3-I之儲存彈性模數之值設為E'(MA)。 (黏著材層之彈性模數) 將實施例、比較例之群3中獲得之黏著材層重疊而積層為1 mm之厚度,使用流變儀(Thermo Fisher Scientific公司製造之MARSII)進行測定。於測定溫度範圍為-50℃~150℃、頻率為1 Hz、升溫速度為3℃/min之條件下進行測定。 於所獲得之資料中,將100℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SA),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SA),將30℃下之儲存彈性模數之值設為G'(SB),將損耗彈性模數之值設為G''(SB),將各溫度條件下之G''/G'之值設為各黏著材層之損耗正切tanδ(SA,SB)。 (成形性) 將實施例、比較例之群3中獲得之賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材積層體之被覆部I剝離,分別使用掃描式白色干涉顯微鏡,以非接觸方式計測相當於印刷階差之凹部與相當於顯示器面之凸部之高度。 計測成形體之凸部(與凹部之邊界部)相對於模具之深度100 μm之高度h,將由下述計算式導出之轉印率為50%以上者評價為「○」,將未達50%者評價為「×」。 轉印率(%)=h(成形體高度)/100(模具深度)×100 (翹曲、彎曲) 將實施例、比較例之群3之各成形條件下所製作之黏著片材積層體切成長度100 mm之正方形,計測各頂點之高度。將所獲得之4點之高度進行平均而以該值作為翹曲。將翹曲之高度未達10 mm者判定為「○」,將為10 mm以上者判定為「×」。 (剝離力) 將實施例、比較例之群3中所製作之黏著片材積層體切成長度150 mm、寬度50 mm,對被覆部3-I與黏著材層之界面以試驗速度300 mm/min進行180°剝離試驗。 將30℃環境下之剝離力設為F(C),將於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃後之剝離力設為F(D),以所獲得之值分別作為被覆部3-I之剝離力。 將實施例3-1~3-3及比較例3-1~3-2中獲得之賦形黏著片材積層體3-1~3-5之評價結果示於表3。 [表3] 根據表3之結果以及至此為止之試驗結果,確認到如實施例3-1至實施例3-3所示,藉由以於被覆部3-I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部3-I之表面溫度成為未達60℃後結束成形,並從模具取出成形品之方式進行成形,而可對黏著材層高精度地賦形凹凸形狀。 另一方面,如比較例3-1所示,若成形開始時之被覆部3-I之溫度未達70℃,則即使進行熱成形亦無法對黏著材層賦形充分之凹凸。 又,得知如比較例3-2所示,若於結束成形並從模具取出成形品時被覆部3-I之表面溫度為70℃以上,則伴隨片材之熱收縮,成形品會產生翹曲或彎曲而欠佳。 由此得知,為了更高精度地進行凹凸賦形,較佳為以於被覆部3-I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部3-I之表面溫度成為未達60℃後結束成形,並從模具取出成形品之方式進行成形。 因此確認,藉由使用如上述之黏著片材積層體,精度良好地賦形相當於成為被黏著體之圖像顯示裝置之印刷階差的凹凸,而可製造與被黏著體之間無間隙、且即使於如印刷部為窄邊緣設計之被黏著體中黏著材亦可不溢出而良好地密接貼合之圖像顯示裝置用賦形黏著片材積層體。 又,就剝離力而言,測定剝離力F(D)時之加熱冷卻條件、即於100℃下加熱5分鐘後使其自然冷卻至30℃之條件係製造賦形黏著片材積層體時之典型之加熱冷卻條件。由於上述實施例中剝離力F(C)與剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值均為0.1 N/cm以下,因此確認剝離力於加熱前後幾乎無變化。 [實施例之群4] 以下之實施例4-1~4-5(以下亦統稱為「實施例之群4」)中所使用之聚酯原料之製造方法如下所述。 (聚酯4-A之製造方法) 取對苯二甲酸二甲酯100份、乙二醇70份、及乙酸鈣一水合物0.07份置於反應器中,進行加熱升溫並且將甲醇蒸餾去除而進行酯交換反應,反應開始後,需要約4個半小時升溫為230℃,而實質性地結束酯交換反應。 繼而,添加磷酸0.04份及三氧化銻0.035份,按照常規方法進行聚合。即,緩緩提高反應溫度,最終設為280℃,另一方面,緩緩降低壓力,最終設為0.05 mmHg。4小時後,結束反應,按照常規方法進行碎片化而獲得聚酯4-A。所獲得之聚酯碎片之極限黏度IV為0.70 dl/g。 (聚酯4-B之製造方法) 於上述聚酯4-A之製造方法中,作為二羧酸單元,將對苯二甲酸設為78 mol%,將間苯二甲酸設為22 mol%,除此以外,藉由與聚酯A相同之方法進行製造而獲得聚酯4-B。所獲得之聚酯碎片之極限黏度IV為0.70 dl/g。 (聚酯4-C之製造方法) 於製造上述聚酯4-A時,添加平均粒徑3 μm之非晶質二氧化矽6000 ppm,而製作聚酯4-C。 (聚酯4-D之製造方法) 於製造上述聚酯4-A時,添加平均粒徑4 μm之非晶質二氧化矽6000 ppm,而製作聚酯4-D。 [實施例4-1] 藉由熔融擠出機將分別以65重量%、30重量%、5重量%之比例混合上述聚酯4-B、4-A、及4-D而成之原料熔融擠出,而獲得單層之無定形片材。 繼而,將片材共擠出至經冷卻之流延鼓上,使其冷卻固化而獲得無配向片材。繼而,於80℃下沿機械方向(縱向)延伸3.4倍後,進一步於拉輻機內經過預熱步驟,而於80℃下沿與機械方向垂直之方向(橫向)延伸3.9倍。進行雙軸延伸後,於185℃下進行3秒之熱處理,其後沿寬度方向進行6.4%之鬆弛處理,而獲得厚度50 μm之聚酯膜。將評價結果示於下述表4。 [實施例4-2]、[實施例4-3] 除了變更為下述表4所示之條件以外,以與實施例4-1相同之方式獲得聚酯膜。將評價結果示於下述表4。 [實施例4-4] 以將上述聚酯4-A及4-C分別以86重量%、14重量%之比例混合而成之原料作為表層用之原料,以將聚酯4-B及4-A分別以45重量%、55重量%之比例混合而成之原料作為中間層用之原料。分別藉由不同之熔融擠出機熔融擠出,而獲得2種3層積層(表層/中間層/表層)之無定形片材。 繼而,藉由將片材共擠出至經冷卻之流延鼓上,並使其冷卻固化,而獲得無配向片材。繼而,於82℃下沿機械方向(MD)延伸3.4倍後,進一步於拉輻機內經過預熱步驟,而於110℃下沿與機械方向垂直之方向(寬度方向,TD)延伸3.9倍。進行雙軸延伸後,於210℃下進行3秒之熱處理,其後沿寬度方向進行2.4%之鬆弛處理,而獲得厚度50 μm之聚酯膜。將評價結果示於下述表4。 [實施例4-5] 除了變更為下述表4所示之條件以外,以與實施例4-4相同之方式獲得聚酯膜。將評價結果示於下述表4。 <測定及評價方法> 對實施例之群4中獲得之樣品之各種物性值之測定方法及評價方法進行說明。 (1)儲存彈性模數(E') 關於實施例之群4中獲得之膜,以長度方向成為機械方向之方式採集長度方向30 mm×寬度方向5 mm之樣品。繼而,使用動態黏彈性裝置(IT Meter and Control公司製造之「DVA-220」),將樣品夾持於將間隔設置為20 mm之夾頭而加以固定後,以升溫速度10℃/min從常溫升溫至200℃,於頻率10 Hz下測定儲存彈性模數。根據所獲得之資料,讀取100℃下之儲存彈性模數。 (2)加熱收縮率 從實施例之群4中獲得之膜之寬度方向中央位置起,以樣品長度方向成為測定方向之方式將樣品切成短條狀(15 mm寬×150 mm長),於無張力狀態、120℃環境下熱處理5分鐘,測定熱處理前後之樣品之長度,藉由下述式計算膜之熱收縮率(%)。再者,下述式中之a為熱處理前之樣品長度,b為熱處理後之樣品長度。 加熱收縮率(%)=[(a-b)/a]×100 (3)加熱處理後之膜表面低聚物量 對於實施例之群4中獲得之膜,於氮氣環境下藉由180℃之熱風循環烘箱將聚酯膜處理10分鐘。使熱處理後之聚酯膜之表面與DMF(二甲基甲醯胺)接觸3分鐘,使析出至表面之低聚物溶解。該操作可採用於例如關於聚烯烴等合成樹脂製食品容器包裝等之自願性基準中,於溶出試驗中之單面溶出法所使用之溶出用器具中所記載之方法。 繼而,視需要藉由稀釋等方法調整所獲得之DMF之濃度,供給於液相層析儀(島津LC-2010)而求出DMF中之低聚物量,該值除以接觸DMF之膜面積,作為膜表面低聚物量(mg/cm2 )。 DMF中之低聚物量係根據標準試樣峰面積與測定試樣峰面積之峰面積比求出(絕對校準曲線法)。 標準試樣之製作係準確地稱量預先分取之低聚物(環狀三聚物),溶解於經準確地稱量之DMF中而製作。標準試樣之濃度較佳為0.001~0.01 mg/ml之範圍。 (4)成型加工適性 將作為(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物之數量平均分子量2400之聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯巨單體(Tg:105℃)15質量份(18 mol%)、丙烯酸丁酯(Tg:-55℃)81質量份(75 mol%)及丙烯酸(Tg:106℃)4質量份(7 mol%)無規共聚合而成之丙烯酸系共聚物(重量平均分子量23萬)1 kg、作為交聯劑之甘油二甲基丙烯酸酯(日油公司製造,製品名:GMR)(b-1)90 g、及作為光聚合起始劑之2,4,6-三甲基二苯甲酮與4-甲基二苯甲酮之混合物(Lanberti公司製造,製品名:Esacure TZT)15 g均勻地混合,而製作黏著片材所使用之樹脂組合物。 利用2片由實施例之群4所示之聚酯膜獲得之離型膜上下夾持所獲得之樹脂組合物(上下之組合設為以相同之離型膜彼此夾持),使用貼合機以樹脂組合物之厚度成為100 μm之方式賦形為片材狀,而製作黏著片材積層體。再者,以與樹脂組合物相接之方式配置聚酯膜之離型層側。 所獲得之黏著片材積層體係使用真空壓空成形機(第一實業公司製造,FKS-0632-20形),藉由以下之製程進行熱成形,而製作賦形黏著片材積層體。即,藉由預熱為400℃之IR加熱器,加熱至黏著片材積層體之表面達到100℃,繼而使用冷卻為25℃之成形用模具,於鎖模壓8 MPa之條件下進行5秒之加壓成形,而製作對表面賦形凹凸而成之賦形黏著片材積層體。 將賦形有凹凸之賦形黏著片材積層體之聚酯膜剝離,分別使用掃描式白色干涉顯微鏡,以非接觸方式計測賦形黏著片材之凹部與凸部之高度,將成形體之高度設為h。 計測成形體之凸部相對於模具之深度100 μm之高度h,將由下述計算式導出之轉印率為70%以上者評價為○,將為50%以上且未達70%者評價為△,將未達50%者評價為×。 轉印率(%)=h(成形體高度)/100(模具深度)×100 (5)黏著層外觀(褶皺) 藉由以下所示之評價方法分別評價藉由(4)所記載之方法獲得之加壓成型前的黏著層積層體之外觀。 <評價方法> ○:得以無褶皺地層壓,保持良好之外觀。 ×:膜產生褶皺,並且褶皺轉印至黏著層,為無法用作製品之狀態。[表4] [產業上之可利用性] 本發明之賦形黏著片材積層體於形成例如個人電腦、移動終端(PDA)、遊戲機、電視(TV)、汽車導航系統、觸控面板、手寫板等之類之圖像顯示裝置時可適宜地使用。 又,本發明之黏著片材積層體或塗佈膜於形成此種賦形黏著片材積層體時可適宜地使用。An example of an embodiment of the present invention will be described below. However, the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments. [This adhesive sheet laminate] An adhesive sheet laminate (referred to as "this adhesive sheet laminate"), which is an example of an embodiment of the present invention, is provided with an adhesive material layer in a peelable manner as shown in FIG. 1. Covering part I formed by laminating on one side of the front and back sides of the adhesive material layer, and adhesive sheet of covering part II formed by laminating on the other side of the front and back sides of the adhesive material layer Laminated body. Here, the coating portion II is arbitrary, and a configuration in which the coating portion II is not laminated may be adopted. <Adhesive material layer> As long as the adhesive material layer of the adhesive sheet laminated body is peeled off from the coating portion I and the coating portion II, it can function as a double-sided adhesive sheet, and has a function of softening or melting if heated. Hot melt only. The adhesive material layer preferably has a loss tangent tan δ (SA) of 100 or more at 100 ° C. The loss tangent tanδ (SB) at 30 ° C is preferably not more than 1.0. Here, the loss tangent tanδ means the ratio (G '' / G ') of the loss elastic modulus G''to the storage elastic modulus G'. Since the temperature at which the adhesive sheet laminate is heated and molded is usually 70 to 120 ° C, if the loss tangent tan δ (SA) at 100 ° C is 1.0 or more, it becomes easy to form an uneven shape on the surface of the adhesive layer. . In addition, if the loss tangent tanδ (SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C is less than 1.0, the shape can be maintained in the normal state, so that it can be maintained on the surface of the adhesive material layer with high accuracy to conform to the unevenness on the surface of the adherend. The state of the uneven shape. Generally, polymer materials have both viscous and elastic properties. The loss tangent tanδ is 1.0 or more. The larger the value, the stronger the viscous properties. On the other hand, the loss tangent tanδ does not reach 1.0, and the smaller the value, the stronger the elastic properties. Therefore, by controlling the loss tangent tanδ of the adhesive material layer at different temperatures, both formability and shape retention can be achieved. From this point of view, the loss tangent tan δ (SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is preferably 1.0 or more, preferably 1.5 or 30 or less, and 3.0 or 20 or less. On the other hand, the loss tangent tan δ (SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C. is preferably less than 1.0, preferably 0.01 or more or 0.9 or less, and more preferably 0.1 or 0.8 or less. Here, the loss tangent tanδ (SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C and the loss tangent tanδ (SB) at 30 ° C can be adjusted by adjusting the components or gel fraction and weight average of the composition constituting the adhesive material layer. The molecular weight is adjusted to the above range. Furthermore, the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is preferably less than 1.0 × 10. 4 Pa. The storage elastic modulus G '(SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C is preferably 1.0 × 10. 4 Pa or more. If the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C does not reach 1.0 × 10 4 Pa is sufficient to obtain sufficient formability. On the other hand, if the storage elastic modulus G '(SB) of the adhesive layer at 30 ° C is 1.0 × 10 4 Pa or more is preferable from the viewpoint of shape stability after forming. From this viewpoint, the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is preferably less than 1.0 × 10. 4 Pa, more preferably 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 3 Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 3 Pa or less. According to this, the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is more preferably 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 Pa or less, preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 3 Pa or less. From this viewpoint, the storage elastic modulus G '(SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C is preferably 1.0 × 10. 4 Pa or more, more preferably 2.0 × 10 4 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 7 Pa or less, of which 5.0 × 10 is more preferred 4 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 6 Pa or less. According to this, the storage elastic modulus G '(SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C is more preferably 1.0 × 10 4 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 7 Pa or less, or 1.0 × 10 4 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 6 Pa or less, more preferably 2.0 × 10 4 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 7 Pa or less, or 2.0 × 10 4 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 6 Pa or less, preferably 5.0 × 10 4 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 6 Pa or less. Here, the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus G' (SB) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C can be adjusted by adjusting the composition of the composition constituting the adhesive material layer. The component, the gel fraction, the weight average molecular weight, and the like are adjusted to the above ranges. The temperature at which the loss tangent tan δ of the adhesive material layer becomes 1.0 is preferably 50 to 150 ° C, more preferably 60 ° C or more or 130 ° C or less, and still more preferably 70 ° C or more or 110 ° C or less. If the temperature at which the loss tangent tan δ of the adhesive material layer becomes 1.0 is 50 to 150 ° C, the present adhesive sheet laminate can be heated to 50 to 150 ° C in advance to perform mold forming. The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the base resin of the adhesive material layer is preferably -50 to 40 ° C, more preferably -30 ° C or more or 25 ° C or less, and still more preferably -10 ° C or more or 20 ° C or less. Here, the measurement of the glass transition temperature refers to the midpoint between the inflection points of the baseline movement when the temperature is raised at a rate of 3 ° C./minute using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC). If the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the base resin of the adhesive material layer is in the above range, adhesion can be imparted to the adhesive material layer, and further, the temperature at which the loss tangent tanδ of the adhesive material layer becomes 1.0 can be adjusted to 50 to 150 ° C. As the material of the adhesive material layer, as long as the material can be prepared with a specific viscoelastic behavior, a conventionally known adhesive sheet can be used. Examples include: 1) using a (meth) acrylic acid ester-based polymer (which has a meaning including a copolymer, hereinafter referred to as "acrylic acid-based (co) polymer") as a base resin, and formulating a crosslinking monomer therein And, if necessary, a crosslinking initiator or a reaction catalyst, and the adhesive sheet formed by the crosslinking reaction; or 2) using a butadiene or isoprene copolymer as a base resin, Among them, cross-linking monomers are prepared, cross-linking initiators or reaction catalysts are prepared as needed, and the adhesive sheet formed by the cross-linking reaction is performed; or 3) a silicone polymer is used as a base resin, and Among them, cross-linking monomers are prepared, cross-linking initiators or reaction catalysts are prepared as needed, and the adhesive sheet formed by cross-linking reaction is performed; or 4) polyurethane-based polymers are used as a basis Polyurethane-based adhesive sheet of resin and the like. Except for the aforementioned viscoelastic properties or thermal properties, the physical properties of the adhesive material layer itself are not an essential problem in the present invention. However, from the viewpoints of adhesiveness, transparency, and weather resistance, the acrylic resin (co) polymer of 1) described above is preferably used as the base resin. In the case where properties such as electrical characteristics and low refractive index are required, the butadiene or isoprene-based copolymer described in 2) above is preferably used as the base resin. When properties such as heat resistance and rubber elasticity in a wide temperature range are required, it is preferable to use the polysiloxane copolymer of 3) as a base resin. When performance such as re-peelability is required, it is preferred to use the polyurethane polymer of 4) as the base resin. As an example of the adhesive material layer, a resin composition containing a (meth) acrylic copolymer (a) as a base resin, a crosslinking agent (b), and a photopolymerization initiator (c) can be exemplified. Sticky sheet. In this case, the above-mentioned viscoelastic properties must be satisfied in an uncrosslinked state, that is, a state before a three-dimensionally crosslinked network structure is formed. From this viewpoint, the gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is preferably 40% or less. If the gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is 40% or less, the bonding between the molecular chains constituting the adhesive material layer can be suppressed to an appropriate range. Therefore, it can have a moderate degree when it is formed into a shaped adhesive sheet laminate. fluidity. From this viewpoint, the gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is preferably 40% or less, particularly preferably 20% or less, and particularly preferably 10% or less. In addition, the lower limit of the gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is not limited, and may be 0%. The gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is not limited to those containing a (meth) acrylic copolymer (a) as a base resin, a crosslinking agent (b), and a photopolymerization initiator (c). The same applies to the case of the resin composition, and the case of using another resin composition as the adhesive material layer. ((Meth) acrylic copolymer (a)) The (meth) acrylic copolymer (a) can be further adjusted according to the type, composition ratio, and the like of the acrylic monomer or methacrylic monomer to be polymerized. The polymerization conditions and the like appropriately adjust the characteristics such as the glass transition temperature (Tg). Examples of the acrylic monomer or methacrylic monomer for polymerizing an acrylate polymer include 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, and methyl. Methyl acrylate, etc. It is also possible to use vinyl acetate, hydroxyethyl acrylate, acrylic acid, glycidyl acrylate, acrylamide, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, and fluoroacrylate which are copolymerized with hydrophilic groups or organic functional groups. , Polysiloxane, etc. Among the acrylate polymers, an alkyl (meth) acrylate-based copolymer is particularly preferred. As the (meth) acrylate used to form the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester-based copolymer, that is, an alkyl acrylate or an alkyl methacrylate component, the alkyl group is preferably n-octyl group and isooctyl group. 1 or 2 or 2 ethylhexyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, or an alkyl methacrylate or an alkyl methacrylate A mixture of two or more. As other components, an acrylate or methacrylate having an organic functional group such as a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, or a glycidyl group may be copolymerized. Specifically, a monomer component composed of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester component and the (meth) acrylic acid ester component having an organic functional group can be appropriately and selectively combined as a starting material to be heat-polymerized to obtain (Meth) acrylate copolymer polymer. Among them, preferred is an alkyl acrylate such as isooctyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, or a mixture of two or more selected from these, or Examples are those obtained by copolymerizing at least one or more of isooctyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, and the like with acrylic acid. As the polymerization treatment using these monomers, known polymerization methods such as solution polymerization, emulsion polymerization, block polymerization, and suspension polymerization can be adopted. In this case, polymerization is performed using a thermal polymerization initiator or a photopolymerization initiator according to the polymerization method. An initiator, whereby an acrylate copolymer can be obtained. (Acrylic copolymer (A1)) As an example of a preferable base polymer for the adhesive material layer, a (meth) acrylic copolymer (A1) including a graft copolymer having a macromonomer as a branched component can be cited. . If the adhesive material layer is constituted by using the acrylic copolymer (A1) as a base resin, the adhesive material layer can maintain a sheet shape at room temperature and exhibit self-adhesion, and if heated in an uncrosslinked state, it will It can be light-hardened by melting or flowing, and can be made to exhibit excellent cohesion after light-hardening. Therefore, if an acrylic copolymer (A1) is used as the base polymer of the adhesive material layer, even if it is in an uncrosslinked state, it exhibits adhesiveness at room temperature (20 ° C) and has a temperature of 50 to 100 when heated. ℃, more preferably a temperature above 60 ° C or below 90 ° C will soften or fluidize. The glass transition temperature of the copolymer constituting the main chain component of the acrylic copolymer (A1) is preferably -70 to 0 ° C. At this time, the glass transition temperature of the copolymer component constituting the main chain component refers to the glass transition temperature of the polymer obtained by copolymerizing only the monomer components constituting the main chain component of the acrylic copolymer (A1). Specifically, it means the value calculated from the calculation formula of Fox based on the glass transition temperature and composition ratio of the polymer obtained from the homopolymer of each component of the copolymer. In addition, the calculation formula of Fox is a calculation value calculated | required by the following formula, and can be calculated | required using the value described in a polymer manual [Polymer HandBook, J. Brandrup, Interscience, 1989]. 1 / (273 + Tg) = Σ (Wi / (273 + Tgi)) [where Wi represents the weight fraction of monomer i and Tgi represents the Tg (° C) of the homopolymer of monomer i] The glass transition temperature of the copolymer component of the main chain component of (A1) will affect the softness of the adhesive material layer at room temperature, or the wettability, that is, the adhesion of the adhesive material layer to the adherend, so for the purpose of adhesion The material layer obtains moderate adhesiveness (adhesiveness) at room temperature. The glass transition temperature is preferably -70 ° C to 0 ° C, particularly preferably -65 ° C or more or -5 ° C or less, and particularly preferably- Above 60 ° C or below -10 ° C. However, even if the glass transition temperature of the copolymer component is the same temperature, the viscoelasticity can be adjusted by adjusting the molecular weight. For example, by reducing the molecular weight of the copolymer component, it can be further softened. Examples of the (meth) acrylate monomer contained in the main chain component of the acrylic copolymer (A1) include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylic acid. Propyl ester, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, second butyl (meth) acrylate, third butyl (meth) acrylate, Amyl (meth) acrylate, isoamyl (meth) acrylate, neopentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate , 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, third butyl cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, ( Decyl (meth) acrylate, isodecyl (meth) acrylate, undecyl (meth) acrylate, lauryl (meth) acrylate, cetyl (meth) acrylate, hard (meth) acrylate Esters, isostearyl (meth) acrylate, behenyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3,5,5 acrylic acid -Trimethylcyclohexyl Ester, p-cumylphenol EO modified (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyloxy (meth) acrylate, Benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like. These can also be used: hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, glyceryl (meth) acrylate, etc., which have a hydrophilic group or an organic functional group, etc. (Meth) acrylic acid esters containing hydroxyl groups; or (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxyethylhexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxypropylhexahydro Phthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloxypropyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl Maleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxypropylmaleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl succinic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxy Carboxyl-containing monomers such as propyl succinic acid, butenoic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid monomethyl ester, and maleic acid monomethyl ester; maleic acid Anhydride group-containing monomers such as oxalic anhydride, itaconic anhydride; glycidyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl α-ethylacrylate, 3,4-epoxybutyl (meth) acrylate, etc. Monomer; dimethylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) propylene (Meth) acrylic monomers containing amine groups such as diethylaminoethyl ester; (meth) acrylamidonium, N-third butyl (meth) acrylamidonium, N-hydroxymethyl (methyl Acrylamide, N-methoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl (meth) acrylamide, diacetone acrylamide, cis-butylene diamine, cis Monobutylene-imide-containing monomers such as butene diamidine; heterocyclic basic monomers such as vinylpyrrolidone, vinylpyridine, and vinylcarbazole. In addition, styrene, third butylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, acrylonitrile, and methyl which can be copolymerized with the above-mentioned acrylic monomer or methacrylic monomer can also be suitably used. Various vinyl monomers, such as acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, alkyl vinyl ether, hydroxyalkyl vinyl ether, and alkyl vinyl monomer. The main chain component of the acrylic copolymer (A1) preferably contains a hydrophobic (meth) acrylate monomer and a hydrophilic (meth) acrylate monomer as constituent units. When the main chain component of the acrylic copolymer (A1) is composed of only a hydrophobic monomer, moist heat and whitening tend to be observed. Therefore, it is preferable to also introduce a hydrophilic monomer into the main chain component to prevent moist and heat whitening. Specifically, as a main chain component of the said acrylic copolymer (A1), the hydrophobic (meth) acrylate monomer, the hydrophilic (meth) acrylate monomer, and the terminal of a macromonomer are mentioned A copolymer component obtained by random copolymerization of polymerizable functional groups. Here, examples of the hydrophobic (meth) acrylate monomer include n-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, second butyl (meth) acrylate, Tert-butyl (meth) acrylate, amyl (meth) acrylate, isoamyl (meth) acrylate, neo-amyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic ring Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Third butyl cyclohexyl acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, isodecyl (meth) acrylate, undecyl (meth) acrylate, lauryl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid Cetyl ester, stearyl (meth) acrylate, isostearyl (meth) acrylate, behenyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, Dicyclopentenyloxy (meth) acrylate, methyl methacrylate. Examples of the hydrophobic vinyl monomer include vinyl acetate, styrene, third butylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, and an alkyl vinyl monomer. Examples of the hydrophilic (meth) acrylate monomer include methyl acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, and tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate; or hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate. (Meth) acrylic acid-containing hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, glyceryl (meth) acrylate, etc .; (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acrylic acid Ethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxypropylhexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl phthalic acid, 2- (formyl) ) Acryloxypropyl phthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl maleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxypropyl maleic acid, 2 -(Meth) acryloxyethylsuccinic acid, 2- (meth) acryloxypropylsuccinic acid, butenoic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid , Monocarboxylic acid-containing monomers such as maleic acid monomethyl ester and monoconic acid; Monocarboxylic acid-containing monomers such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride; glycidyl (meth) acrylate, α-ethyl Glycidyl acrylate, 3,4-epoxy (meth) acrylate Epoxy group-containing monomers such as butyl ester; alkoxy polyalkylene glycol (meth) acrylates such as methoxy polyethylene glycol (meth) acrylate; N, N-dimethylacrylamide , Hydroxyethyl acrylamide, and so on. The acrylic copolymer (A1) preferably incorporates a macromonomer as a branching component of the graft copolymer, and contains a repeating unit derived from the macromonomer. The so-called macromonomer system has a polymerizable functional group at the terminal and a polymer monomer with a high molecular weight skeleton component. The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the macromonomer is preferably higher than the glass transition temperature of the copolymer component constituting the acrylic copolymer (A1). Specifically, since the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the macromonomer will affect the heating melting temperature (hot melting temperature) of the adhesive material layer 2, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the macromonomer is preferably 30 ° C to 120 Among these, it is more preferably 40 ° C or more or 110 ° C or less, and more preferably 50 ° C or more or 100 ° C or less. If it is such a glass transition temperature (Tg), it can maintain excellent processability or storage stability by adjusting molecular weight, and it can be adjusted by hot-melting around 80 degreeC. The so-called glass transition temperature of the macromonomer refers to the glass transition temperature of the macromonomer itself, which can be measured by a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC). In addition, in order to maintain the branched components close to each other at room temperature, the adhesive composition is physically cross-linked, and the physical cross-linking can be released by heating to a moderate temperature to obtain flow. It is also preferable to adjust the molecular weight or content of the macromonomer. From this viewpoint, the macromonomer is preferably contained in the acrylic copolymer (A1) in a proportion of 5% to 30% by mass, and among them, 6% by mass or more or 25% by mass or less is preferred, and among these, It is 8 mass% or more and 20 mass% or less. The number average molecular weight of the macromonomer is preferably 500 or more and less than 8,000, of which 800 or more or 7500 is preferred, and 1000 or more or 7,000 is preferred. As the macromonomer, an ordinary manufacturer (for example, a macromonomer produced by Toa Kosei, etc.) can be appropriately used. The high molecular weight skeleton component of the macromonomer preferably contains an acrylic polymer or an ethylene polymer. Examples of the high molecular weight skeleton component of the macromonomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, and (methyl) Base) n-butyl acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, second butyl (meth) acrylate, third butyl (meth) acrylate, amyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate Amyl ester, neopentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, Isooctyl acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, isononyl (meth) acrylate, tert-butylcyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, isodecyl (meth) acrylate Ester, undecyl (meth) acrylate, lauryl (meth) acrylate, cetyl (meth) acrylate, stearyl (meth) acrylate, isostearyl (meth) acrylate, ( Behenyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexyl acrylate, p-cumylphenol EO modified (A (Meth) acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyloxy (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid Hydroxyalkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, N, N-dimethyl (meth) acrylamide, (meth) acrylonitrile, (Meth) acrylate monomers such as alkoxyalkyl (meth) acrylates, alkoxy polyalkylene glycol (meth) acrylates; or styrene, third butylstyrene, α- Various vinyl monomers such as methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, alkyl vinyl monomer, vinyl acetate, alkyl vinyl ether, and hydroxyalkyl vinyl ether, and these can be used alone or in combination of two or more kinds. Examples of the terminal polymerizable functional group of the macromonomer include a methacryl group, acryl group, and vinyl group. (Crosslinking agent (b)) The crosslinking agent (b) can be used as a crosslinking monomer for crosslinking an acrylate polymer. For example, it has a material selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylfluorenyl, epoxy, isocyanate, carboxyl, hydroxyl, carbodiimide, oxazoline, aziridinyl, vinyl, amino, and imine. As the crosslinking agent of at least one type of crosslinkable functional group among the amino group and the sulfonylamino group, one type may be used or two or more types may be used in combination. The crosslinkable functional group may be protected by a protective group capable of being deprotected. Among them, a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having two or more (meth) acrylfluorenyl groups can be preferably used; having two or more isocyanate groups, epoxy groups, melamine groups, glycol groups, and siloxanes Multifunctional organic functional resins with organic functional groups such as amine and amine groups; organometallic compounds with metal complexes such as zinc, aluminum, sodium, zirconium, and calcium. Examples of the polyfunctional (meth) acrylate include 1,4-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, and glycerol di (meth) acrylate , Glycerol glycidyl ether di (meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane dimethanol (Meth) acrylate, bisphenol A polyethoxydi (meth) acrylate, bisphenol A polyalkoxydi (meth) acrylate, bisphenol F polyalkoxydi (meth) acrylic acid Ester, polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane trioxyethyl (meth) acrylate, ε-caprolactone modified tri (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanate Uric acid tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate ethoxylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate , Pentaerythritol tetrakis (meth) acrylate propionate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate ethoxylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, (Propylene ethoxyethyl) isocyanurate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, tripentaerythritol hexa (methyl) Acrylate, tripentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, hydroxy-pivalate neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, ε-caprolactone adducts of hydroxypivalate neopentyl glycol (two) Base) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, alkoxylated trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, bis (trimethylolpropane) tetra (meth) acrylate, etc. Examples of the hardening type polyfunctional monomer include polyester (meth) acrylate, epoxy (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate urethane, and polyether (methyl ) Multifunctional acrylate oligomers such as acrylate. Among the above, from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion to the adherend or suppressing the effect of moist heat and whitening, it is preferable that the above-mentioned polyfunctional (meth) acrylate monomer contains a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and an amido group. Polyfunctional monomer or oligomer with isopolar functional groups. Among these, it is preferable to use a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate having a hydroxyl group or an amido group. From the viewpoint of preventing moist heat whitening, as the main chain component of the (meth) acrylate copolymer, for example, a graft copolymer, a hydrophobic acrylate monomer and a hydrophilic acrylate monomer are preferred, Furthermore, it is preferable to use a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate which has a hydroxyl group as a crosslinking agent. In addition, in order to adjust effects such as adhesion, moisture and heat resistance, and heat resistance, a monofunctional or polyfunctional (meth) acrylate that reacts with a crosslinking agent may be further added. From the viewpoint of balancing the flexibility and cohesion of the adhesive composition, the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably contained in a proportion of 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the (meth) acrylic copolymer. Among them, particularly preferred is a ratio of 0.5 parts by mass or more or 15 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferred is a ratio of 1 part by mass or more or 13 parts by mass or less. (Photopolymerization initiator (c)) When the acrylate polymer is crosslinked, a crosslinking initiator (peroxidation initiator, photopolymerization initiator) or a reaction catalyst (tertiary amine system) is appropriately added if appropriate. Compounds, quaternary ammonium compounds, tin laurate compounds, etc.) are more effective. In the case of cross-linking by ultraviolet irradiation, it is preferred to blend a photopolymerization initiator (c). Photopolymerization initiators (c) are roughly classified into two types according to the mechanism of free radical generation, and are roughly divided into: photocatalytic initiators which can break the single bond of the photopolymerizable initiator itself to generate free radicals ; And a photo-excited photopolymerization initiator that forms an excitation complex with the hydrogen donor in the system and enables hydrogen transfer by the hydrogen donor. Among these, the cleavage type photopolymerization initiator decomposes into other compounds when free radicals are generated by light irradiation, and once excited, it loses its function as a reaction initiator. Therefore, if the intramolecular cleavage type is used as a photopolymerization initiator having an absorption wavelength in the visible light region, compared with the case of using a hydrogen abstraction type, after the adhesive sheet is crosslinked by light irradiation, the light reacts. Photopolymerizable initiators are preferred because they remain as unreacted residues in the present adhesive composition, leading to unpredictable changes over time in the adhesive sheet or to promote cross-linking. In addition, as for the coloring peculiar to the photopolymerizable initiator, it is also possible to appropriately select a color that decolorizes by disappearing absorption in the visible region by becoming a reaction decomposition product. On the other hand, when the photopolymerization initiator of the hydrogen abstraction type is irradiated with active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays to generate a radical reaction, it does not generate a decomposition product such as a cleavage type photopolymerization initiator, so it is difficult after the reaction is completed. It becomes a volatile component, which can reduce the damage to the adherend. Examples of the cleavage type photopolymerization initiator include 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one, 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, and 2-hydroxy- 2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1-one, 1- (4- (2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl) -2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-propane-1-one, 2-hydroxy-1- [4- {4- (2-hydroxy-2-methyl-propanyl) benzyl} phenyl] -2-methyl-propane-1-one, oligo (2-hydroxy 2-methyl-1- (4- (1-methylvinyl) phenyl) acetone), methyl phenylglyoxylate, 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4- Phenylphenyl) butane-1-one, 2-methyl-1- [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-olinylpropane-1-one, 2- (dimethylamino)- 2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-olinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl) ) -Phenylphosphine oxide, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene diphenylphosphine oxide, (2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene) ethoxyphenylphosphine oxide, bis (2,6-dimethoxybenzylidene) 2,4,4-trimethylpentylphosphine oxide, or derivatives thereof. Among these, bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl) -phenyl is preferred in terms of discoloration due to cleavage-type photopolymerizable initiator as a decomposition product after the reaction. Phosphine oxide, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene diphenylphosphine oxide, (2,4,6-trimethylbenzylidene) ethoxyphenylphosphine oxide, bis (2,6 -Dimethoxybenzylidene) fluorenylphosphine oxide-based photoinitiators such as 2,4,4-trimethylpentylphosphine oxide. Further, in terms of compatibility with an acrylic copolymer including a graft copolymer having a macromonomer as a branched component, it is preferable to use 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyldiphenyl Phosphine oxide, (2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl) ethoxyphenyl phosphine oxide, bis (2,6-dimethoxybenzyl) 2,4,4-trimethyl Amylphosphine oxide and the like serve as a photopolymerization initiator. The content of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited. For example, based on 100 parts by mass of the (meth) acrylic copolymer, 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, particularly preferably 0.2 parts by mass or more or 5 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more, or 3 parts by mass. It is contained in the following ratio. However, in terms of balance with other elements, this range can also be exceeded. The photopolymerization initiator may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds. In addition to the above ingredients, pigments such as pigments or dyes with near-infrared absorbing properties, adhesion-imparting agents, antioxidants, anti-aging agents, hygroscopic agents, ultraviolet absorbers, silane coupling agents, natural materials, or synthetics can be appropriately blended as needed. Additives such as resins, glass fibers or glass beads. (Layer Structure and Thickness of the Adhesive Material Layer) In addition to the single layer, the adhesive material layer may be a plurality of layers such as two layers and three layers. In addition, the adhesive material layer may have a base material layer (a layer having no adhesiveness) as a core layer, and a layer including an adhesive material layer is laminated on both sides of the base material layer. In the case of such a structure, it is preferable that the base material layer which is a core layer has a material or a characteristic which becomes possible to heat-mold an adhesive sheet laminated body. The adhesive material layer other than the base material layer preferably has a loss tangent tanδ (SA), a loss tangent tanδ (SB), a storage elastic modulus G '(SA), and a storage elastic modulus G' (SB). The above characteristics. The thickness of the adhesive material layer is not particularly limited. Among these, a range of 20 μm to 500 μm is preferred. If it is within this range, for example, if it is a thin adhesive material layer having a thickness of 20 μm, for example, an adhesive sheet having excellent followability in printing steps can be provided. In addition, if it is a thick adhesive material layer having a thickness of 500 μm, it is possible to suppress the overflow of the adhesive material during bonding by forming an amount equivalent to a printing step in advance. Therefore, the thickness of the adhesive material layer is preferably 20 μm to 500 μm, in which the thickness is more preferably 30 μm or more or 300 μm or less, and further preferably 50 μm or more or 200 μm or less. <Coated part I> As shown in FIG. 1, this adhesive sheet laminated body is provided with the following coated part I, which is laminated on one of the front side and the back side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, for example, the front side Shaped uneven side. The storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C is preferably 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa. Since the temperature for the heat-molding of the adhesive sheet laminate is generally 70 to 120 ° C, the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) at 100 ° C is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, in the temperature range in which the above-mentioned adhesive composition is plasticized to flow, the coating portion I can also fully follow the uneven shape and deform. Not only this, but also an adhesive material layer that can be squeezed by the coating portion I during molding. The surface is formed with a desired uneven shape with high accuracy, for example, to avoid corner rounding. Previously, as a release film laminated on an adhesive sheet, a material having a higher storage elastic modulus, in other words, a "harder" material was used. The reason is that the characteristics required for the release film are mainly protection of the adhesive material layer and release properties. However, according to research by the present inventors, it has been found that in the case of a new application in which a release film is laminated on an adhesive sheet for thermoforming, when a new issue of thermoformability is required, The physical properties of the film as described above cannot meet the requirements. Therefore, a detailed investigation was performed on the phenomenon occurring during thermoforming or the characteristics of the adhesive layer. As a result, it was found that a characteristic different from the release film that has been conventionally used to solve the new problem of thermoformability In terms of advantages. It has been found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved especially by controlling the storage elastic modulus at a specific range to a specific range. From this viewpoint, the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C is preferably 1.0 × 10. 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, more preferably 5.0 × 10 6 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 9 Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 7 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 8 Pa or less. Accordingly, the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C is more preferably 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 Pa, of which, more preferably 5.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, the best is 1.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa or less, or 1.0 × 10 7 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 Pa. The storage elastic modulus E '(MB) of the coating portion I at 30 ° C is preferably 5.0 × 10. 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa. If the storage elastic modulus E '(MB) of the coated part I at 30 ° C is 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa can maintain shape retention under normal conditions, so it is easier to handle, such as easy peeling. Not only that, because it is not too hard, it can prevent the adhesive material layer from forming irregularities that are not intended. From this point of view, the storage elastic modulus E '(MB) of the coating portion I at 30 ° C is preferably 5.0 × 10. 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa, more preferably 1.0 × 10 8 Above Pa or 8.0 × 10 9 Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 9 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 9 Pa or less. According to this, the storage elastic modulus E '(MB) of the coating portion I at 30 ° C is more preferably 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 5.0 × 10 9 Pa, of which, more preferably 1.0 × 10 8 Pa ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 8 Pa ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, the best is 1.0 × 10 9 ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 9 ~ 5.0 × 10 9 Pa. In order to adjust the storage elastic modulus of the coating portion I at 30 ° C and 100 ° C as described above, the coating portion I can be adjusted by, for example, adjusting the type of base resin, copolymer resin component, weight average molecular weight, glass transition temperature, crystallinity, and the like The material conditions are adjusted by adjusting the production conditions such as the presence or absence of extension, forming conditions, and adjustment of extension conditions in the case of extension. It is not limited to these methods. Furthermore, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus E' (MB) of the coating portion I at 30 ° C satisfy the following relational expression (1). (1) ・ ・ E '(MB) / E' (MA) ≧ 2.0 If the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating part I at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus E of the coating part I at 30 ° C '(MB) satisfies the above-mentioned relational expression (1), and since sufficient moldability can be obtained, it is more preferable. From this viewpoint, E '(MB) / E' (MA) ≧ 2.0 is preferred, and 30′E ′ (MB) / E '(MA) or E' (MB) / E 'is further preferred. (MA) ≧ 3.0, with 10 ≧ E '(MB) / E' (MA) or E '(MB) / E' (MA) ≧ 5.0 being particularly preferred. In order to adjust the relationship between E '(MB) and E' (MA) as described above, for example, the material of the coating portion I can be adjusted by adjusting the type of base resin, copolymer resin component, weight average molecular weight, glass transition temperature, and crystallinity. Conditions, and adjust the production conditions such as the presence or absence of drawing, forming conditions, and adjustment of the drawing conditions when drawing. It is not limited to these methods. Furthermore, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus E' (MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C satisfy the following relationship (2) ). (2) ・ ・ 1.0 × 10 3 ≦ E '(MA) / G' (SA) ≦ 1.0 × 10 7 If the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus E' (MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C satisfy the above-mentioned relational expression (2), it is possible to obtain sufficient The formability is better. From this viewpoint, E '(MA) / G' (SA) is preferably 1.0 × 10. 3 ~ 1.0 × 10 7 Of which the best is 5.0 × 10 3 Above or 5.0 × 10 6 Below, especially preferred is 1.0 × 10 4 Above or 1.0 × 10 6 the following. Based on this, E '(MA) / G' (SA) is more preferably 1.0 × 10 3 ~ 5.0 × 10 6 , Or 1.0 × 10 3 ~ 1.0 × 10 6 , And further preferably 5.0 × 10 3 ~ 5.0 × 10 6 , Or 5.0 × 10 3 ~ 1.0 × 10 6 , The best is 1.0 × 10 4 ~ 5.0 × 10 6 , Or 1.0 × 10 4 ~ 1.0 × 10 6 . In order to adjust E '(MA) and G' (SA) to the above-mentioned relationship, the characteristics of the adhesive material layer or the coating portion I may be adjusted. The characteristics of the adhesive material layer can be achieved, for example, by adjusting the components of the composition constituting the adhesive material layer, the gel fraction, the weight average molecular weight, and the like. In addition, as the characteristics of the coating portion I, for example, the conditions of the material of the coating portion I, such as the type of the base resin, the copolymer resin component, the weight average molecular weight, the glass transition temperature, and crystallinity, can be adjusted, and the presence or absence of elongation and molding conditions can be adjusted. In the case of extension, adjust the manufacturing conditions such as extension conditions. It is not limited to these methods. The peeling force F (C) of the coated portion I when the coated portion I is peeled from the adhesive material layer in a 30 ° C environment is preferably 0.2 N / cm or less. When the peeling force F (C) is 0.2 N / cm or less, the coating portion I can be easily peeled from the adhesive material layer. From this point of view, the peeling force F (C) is preferably 0.2 N / cm or less, more preferably 0.01 N / cm or more or 0.15 N / cm or less, and even more preferably 0.02 N / cm or more. 0.1 N / cm or less. Further, for the coating part I, the adhesive sheet laminate was heated at 100 ° C for 5 minutes, and then cooled to 30 ° C. The peeling force F (D) when the coating part I was peeled from the adhesive layer at 30 ° C It is preferably 0.2 N / cm or less. If the adhesive sheet laminate is heated at 100 ° C for 5 minutes and then cooled to 30 ° C, and the peel force F (D) measured under the environment of 30 ° C is the same as the above-mentioned peel force F (C), even if the The adhesive sheet laminate is formed by heating, and the peeling force F (D) does not change. Therefore, the coating portion I can be easily peeled from the adhesive layer. From this viewpoint, the peeling force F (D) is preferably 0.2 N / cm or less, more preferably 0.01 N / cm or more or 0.15 N / cm or less, and even more preferably 0.02 N / cm or more. 0.1 N / cm or less. Furthermore, it is preferable that the absolute value of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) of the coating portion I is 0.1 N / cm or less. If the laminated sheet is heated at 100 ° C for 5 minutes and then cooled to 30 ° C, the absolute difference between the peeling force F (D) measured at 30 ° C and the peeling force F (C) under normal conditions is absolute. When the value is 0.1 N / cm or less, the peeling force F (D) does not change even if the adhesive sheet laminate is thermoformed, so that the coating portion I can be easily peeled from the adhesive material layer. From this viewpoint, the absolute value of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) is preferably 0.1 N / cm or less, more preferably 0.08 N / cm or less, and even more preferably 0.05. N / cm or less. The peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) of the coating portion I can be adjusted by the type of the release layer formed on one side of the coating portion I, and the like. It is not limited to this method. Examples of the configuration of the coating portion I include a configuration example including a coating base layer and a release layer. By forming a single-area release layer on the covering base material layer, the covering portion I can be configured to be easily peeled from the adhesive material layer. In this case, the coated base material layer preferably includes, as a main component, one resin or two or more resins selected from the group consisting of polyester, copolymerized polyester, polyolefin, and copolymerized polyolefin. A stretched or unstretched layer, that is, a single or multi-layer containing a stretched or unstretched film with the resin as the main component. Among these, the coating base material layer constituting the coating portion I is preferably provided with an extension containing, for example, a copolymerized polyester, a polyolefin, or a copolymerized polyolefin as a main component from the viewpoints of mechanical strength and chemical resistance. Or single or multiple layers of unstretched film. Specific examples of the above-mentioned copolymerized polyester include, for example, any of phthalic acid as a dicarboxylic acid and cyclohexanedimethanol as a diol, 1,4-butanediol, and diethylene glycol. Copolymerized polyethylene terephthalate. Specific examples of the polyolefin include an α-olefin homopolymer, and examples include a propylene homopolymer and a homopolymer of 4-methylpentene-1. Specific examples of the polyolefin copolymer include copolymers of ethylene, propylene, other α-olefins, and vinyl monomers. The release layer is preferably a layer containing a modified polyolefin in addition to a release agent such as polysiloxane. Here, as a modified olefin which comprises the said release layer, the resin which has polyolefin modified by unsaturated carboxylic acid or its anhydride, or a silane coupling agent as a main component is mentioned. Examples of the unsaturated carboxylic acid or its anhydride include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, maleic acid, maleic anhydride, citraconic acid, citraconic anhydride, itaconic acid, itaconic anhydride, or the like A monoepoxy compound of a derivative and an ester compound of the above-mentioned acid, a reaction product of a polymer and an acid having a group capable of reacting with these acids in the molecule, and the like. Moreover, these metal salts can also be used. Among these, maleic anhydride can be more preferably used. Moreover, these copolymers can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types. In order to produce a modified polyolefin-based resin, for example, the modified monomer may be copolymerized in advance at the stage of polymerizing the polymer, or the temporarily polymerized polymer may be graft-copolymerized with the modified monomer. . In addition, as the modified polyolefin-based resin, these modified monomers may be used alone or in combination, and the content ratio thereof is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.3% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.5. The mass range is at least 5 mass%, preferably at most 4.5 mass%, and more preferably at most 4.0 mass%. Among them, those graft-modified can be suitably used. Suitable examples of the modified polyolefin-based resin include maleic anhydride-modified polypropylene resin, maleic anhydride-modified polyethylene resin, maleic anhydride ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, and the like. . From the viewpoint of moldability, the thickness of the coating portion I is preferably from 10 μm to 500 μm, particularly preferably 20 μm or more or 300 μm or less, and particularly preferably 30 μm or more or 150 μm or less. <Coated part II> As described above, the present adhesive sheet laminate can be used to laminate the coated part I in a peelable manner on one of the front and back sides of the adhesive layer, and on the opposite side to the coated part I, that is, The other side of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer is formed by laminating the covering part II in a peelable manner. Therefore, the workability can be improved by laminating the coating portion II on the other side of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the coating portion II is not laminated. As long as the coating portion II is formed by laminating on the other side of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, the material and structure thereof are not particularly limited. The coating portion II may be, for example, the same laminated structure and material as the coating portion I described above. In this case, the coating portion II may have the same thickness as the coating portion I or a different thickness. If the covering portion II has the same laminated structure and material as the covering portion I, it is possible to prevent warping from occurring when the present adhesive sheet laminate is heated. The coating part II can also adopt the same structure as the coating part I, but the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) at 100 ° C, the storage elastic modulus E' (MB) at 30 ° C, and the ratio (E '(MB) / E' (MA)), peeling force F (C), peeling force F (D), and the like are different from those of the coating portion I. Furthermore, the coating part II may be a laminated structure and a material different from those of the coating part I described above. As the coating portion II, for example, a commonly used release film (also referred to as a "release film") may be used. Specifically, the storage elastic modulus E '(MC) at 100 ° C is 2.0 × 10. 9 ~ 1.0 × 10 11 As the material of Pa, for example, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film can be used. [Coated Part I] As a configuration example of the coated part I described above, a coating film having a coating layer provided on one side of a copolymerized polyester film, and a storage elastic modulus E ′ at 100 ° C. of 1.5 × 10 9 A coating film (hereinafter referred to as "the present coating film") characterized by Pa will be described. If this coating film is used, for example, after heating the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, a mold is pressed against the coating film provided with a release coating layer, and the adhesive sheet can be formed on the adhesive sheet. The surface is formed with an uneven shape conforming to the uneven portion on the surface of the adherend with high accuracy. In addition, since the coating film can maintain shape retention in a normal state, it is easy to handle. Moreover, since the coating film is not too hard, it can prevent the adhesive sheet from forming irregularities that are not intended. <Copolymerized Polyester Film> The copolymerized polyester film constituting the coating film may have a single-layer structure or a laminated structure. For example, in addition to the two-layer and three-layer structures, as long as the purpose of the present invention is not exceeded, The number of layers may be four or more, and it is not particularly limited. For example, when a three-layer structure (surface layer / intermediate layer / surface layer) is used, any one layer of the surface layer or the intermediate layer, or a layer of two or more layers may be used as the copolymer polyester component, and the remaining The layer is constituted by a polyester component containing no copolymerization component. The copolymerized polyester film refers to a film obtained by cooling a molten polyester sheet extruded by an extrusion method and stretching it if necessary. The dicarboxylic acid component of the copolymerized polyester is preferably terephthalic acid. In addition, it may also contain oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, and phthalic acid. One or more known dicarboxylic acids such as dicarboxylic acid, isophthalic acid, naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, diphenyl ether dicarboxylic acid, and cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid are used as the copolymerization component. In addition, as the diol component, ethylene glycol is preferred, and in addition thereto, it may contain propylene glycol, trimethylene glycol, tetramethylene glycol, hexamethylene glycol, and 1,4-cyclohexane. One or more kinds of well-known glycols such as dimethanol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, polyalkylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, etc., are used as the copolymerization component. Among them, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid as a dicarboxylic acid component, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, 1,4-butanediol, and diethylene glycol as diol components are more preferable. Copolymerized polyethylene terephthalate which is arbitrarily copolymerized. The content of the copolymerization component is preferably 1 mol% or more and 50 mol% or less, more preferably 3 mol% or more or 40 mol% or less, and further preferably 4 mol% or more or 30 mol% or less. When the content of the copolymerization component is 1 mol% or more, when it is laminated with the adhesive sheet, a concave shape, a convex shape, or an uneven shape can be formed on the surface of the adhesive sheet. On the other hand, when it is 50 mol% or less, it not only has sufficient dimensional stability, but also can sufficiently suppress the occurrence of wrinkles during processing. The melting point of the copolymerized polyester film is preferably designed to be in a range of preferably 260 ° C or lower, more preferably 200 to 255 ° C. With the above melting point being 260 ° C. or lower, in the heat treatment step after stretching, sufficient strength can be obtained even if the heat treatment is performed at a temperature lower than the melting point of the copolymerized polyester film. In terms of improving the workability of the film, it is preferable to include particles in the copolymerized polyester film. Examples of particles include inorganic particles such as calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, calcium sulfate, barium sulfate, lithium phosphate, magnesium phosphate, calcium phosphate, lithium fluoride, alumina, silica, and kaolin; acrylic resins, guanamine resins, and the like Organic particles; precipitated particles obtained by granulating the catalyst residuals, but it is not limited to these. The particle diameter of these particles or the content in the copolymerized polyester film can be appropriately determined according to the purpose. The contained particles may be a single component or two or more components may be used simultaneously. Various stabilizers, lubricants, antistatic agents, and the like may be appropriately added. The average particle diameter of the particles contained in the copolymerized polyester film is preferably 0.1 to 5.0 μm. When the average particle diameter of the particles is less than 0.1 μm, the sliding properties of the film may be insufficient and the workability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the average particle diameter of the particles exceeds 5.0 μm, the smoothness of the film surface may be impaired. The content of the particles contained in the copolymerized polyester film is preferably 0.01 to 0.3% by weight. When the content of the particles is less than 0.01% by weight, the sliding properties of the film may be insufficient and the workability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the content of the particles exceeds 0.3% by weight, the smoothness of the film surface may be impaired. The method for adding particles to the copolymerized polyester film is not particularly limited, and a known method can be adopted. For example, it can be added at any stage of manufacturing polyester, preferably at the stage of esterification, or it can also be added in the form of a slurry dispersed in ethylene glycol, etc. at the stage before the polycondensation reaction after the transesterification reaction is completed Instead, a polycondensation reaction is performed. In addition, by using a kneading extruder with a vent hole, a method of blending a slurry of particles dispersed in ethylene glycol or water with a polyester material, or using a kneading extruder to dry the particles A method of blending with a polyester raw material, a method of precipitating particles in a polyester manufacturing step system, and the like are performed. The limiting viscosity of the copolymerized polyester is usually 0.40 to 1.10 dl / g, preferably 0.45 to 0.90 dl / g, and further preferably 0.50 to 0.80 dl / g. If the limiting viscosity does not reach 0.40 dl / g, there is a tendency for the mechanical strength of the film to become weaker. When the limiting viscosity exceeds 1.10 dl / g, there is a case where the melt viscosity becomes high and excessive load is applied to the extruder. situation. Next, although the manufacturing example of a copolymerized polyester film is demonstrated concretely, it is not limited at all by the following manufacturing examples. The method is preferably as follows: first, using the previously described copolymerized polyester raw material, the molten sheet extruded from the die is cooled and solidified by a cooling roller to obtain an unstretched sheet. In this case, in order to improve the flatness of the sheet, it is necessary to improve the adhesion between the sheet and the rotary cooling drum. The electrostatic application and / or liquid coating adhesion method can be preferably used. Further, it is preferable to extend the obtained unstretched sheet at least in a uniaxial direction, and more preferably a biaxial extension in a biaxial direction. For example, in the case of biaxial stretching, in the case of sequential biaxial stretching, the unstretched sheet is stretched in one direction in a mechanical direction by a roller or a stretching machine. The stretching temperature is usually 70 to 120 ° C, preferably 75 to 110 ° C, and the stretching ratio is usually 2.5 to 7.0 times, preferably 3.0 to 6.0 times. Secondly, it extends in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction (mechanical direction) of the first stage. The stretching temperature is usually 70 to 170 ° C, and the stretching ratio is usually 3.0 to 7.0 times, preferably 3.5 to 6.0 times. Then, heat treatment is continued at a temperature of 150 to 270 ° C under stretching or relaxation within 30% to obtain a biaxial alignment film. In the above-mentioned biaxial extension, a method of performing two or more stages of extension in one direction may also be adopted. In this case, it is preferable to carry out in such a manner that the stretching magnifications in the two directions finally become the above ranges, respectively. In addition, as for the production of the copolymerized polyester film, simultaneous biaxial stretching may be adopted. At the same time, biaxial stretching is a method in which the unstretched sheet is simultaneously stretched and aligned in a mechanical direction and a width direction under a temperature controlled state at generally 70 to 120 ° C, preferably 75 to 110 ° C. The stretching magnification is preferably 4 to 50 times, more preferably 7 to 35 times, and even more preferably 10 to 25 times in terms of area magnification. Then, heat treatment is continued at a temperature of 150 to 250 ° C. under stretching or relaxation within 30% to obtain a biaxially stretched film. As for the simultaneous biaxial extension device adopting the above-mentioned extension method, a spiral method, a scaler method, a linear drive method, and the like known from the previous can be used. (Coating layer) In this coating film, it is important to provide a coating layer on at least one side of the copolymerized polyester film. The coating layer is not particularly limited, and specific examples include a release layer, an antistatic layer, an oligomer sealing layer, an easy-adhesion layer, and an undercoat layer. Among them, a release layer is more preferable in terms of manufacturing an adhesive sheet laminate which is laminated with an adhesive sheet. Moreover, you may combine two or more types of functional layers as mentioned above. As a specific example of the coating layer constituting the coating film, a release layer will be described below. Specifically, the type of the resin used in the release layer includes hardened silicone resins, fluorine-based resins, and polyolefin-based resins, among which hardened silicone resins are preferred. It can be a hardened silicone resin, or a type containing a hardened silicone resin as the main component. Within the scope of not harming the spirit of the present invention, it can also be used with urethane resin, ring Modified polysiloxane based on graft polymerization of organic resins such as oxygen resins and alkyd resins. As the type of the curing type silicone resin, any curing reaction type such as addition molding, condensation type, ultraviolet curing type, electron beam curing type, and solventless type can be used. Specific examples include KS-774, KS-775, KS-778, KS-779H, KS-847H, KS-856, X-62-2422, and X-62 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. -2461, X-62-1387, X-62-5039, X-62-5040, KNS-3051, X-62-1496, KNS320A, KNS316, X-62-1574A / B, X-62-7052, X -62-7028A / B, X-62-7619, X-62-7213; YSR-3022, TPR-6700, TPR-6720, TPR-6672, TPR6500, TPR6501, UV9300, UV9425, XS56- manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials A2775, XS56-A2982, UV9430, TPR6600, TPR6604, TPR6605; SRX357, SRX211, SD7220, SD7292, LTC750A, LTC760A, LTC303E, SP7259, BY24-468C, SP7248S, BY24-452, DKQ3- manufactured by Dow Corning Toray Co., Ltd. 202, DKQ3-203, DKQ3-204, DKQ3-205, DKQ3-210, etc. Furthermore, in order to adjust the peelability of a release layer, etc., a peel control agent may be used together. The hardening conditions when forming a release layer on a copolymerized polyester film are not particularly limited. In the case of providing a release layer by offline coating, it is generally appropriate to perform heat treatment at 120 to 200 ° C for 3 to 40 seconds, preferably at 100 to 180 ° C for 3 to 40 seconds. In addition, if necessary, a combination of heat treatment and active energy ray irradiation such as ultraviolet irradiation may be used. In addition, as an energy source for hardening by active energy ray irradiation, a device and an energy source known from the past can be used. The coating amount of the release layer (after drying) is generally 0.005 to 1 g / m in terms of coating properties. 2 The range is preferably 0.005 to 0.5 g / m 2 Range, more preferably 0.01 to 0.2 g / m 2 Range. The coating amount (after drying) is less than 0.005 g / m 2 In some cases, there is a case in which stability is lacking in terms of coatability and it is difficult to obtain a uniform coating film. On the other hand, at more than 1 g / m 2 On the other hand, in the case of thick coating, the adhesion and hardenability of the coating film of the release layer itself may be reduced. As a method for providing a release layer on the copolymerized polyester film, a conventionally known method such as reverse gravure coating, direct gravure coating, roll coating, die coating, bar coating, and curtain coating can be used. Of coating method. Regarding the application method, there are recorded examples in "application method" (by Yoshizumi Harajaki, published by 1979). In addition, in order to provide a coating layer on the copolymerized polyester film, surface treatments such as corona treatment, plasma treatment, and ultraviolet irradiation treatment may be performed in advance. (Coated film) The thickness of the coated film is usually 9 μm to 250 μm, preferably 12 μm to 125 μm, and further preferably 25 μm to 75 μm. When the thickness is less than 9 μm, the film tension may become insufficient, and abnormalities such as wrinkles are likely to occur when cutting. On the other hand, if it exceeds 250 μm, for example, the followability to a molded article having a curved shape may be insufficient. The storage elastic modulus E 'of the coating film at 100 ° C is 1.5 × 10 9 Pa or less, preferably 1.0 × 10 9 Pa or less. With the above storage elastic modulus E 'is 1.5 × 10 9 Pa or less, when laminated with the adhesive sheet, a concave shape, a convex shape, or an uneven shape can be formed on the surface of the adhesive sheet. In order to make the storage elastic modulus E ′ at 100 ° C. satisfy the above range, it can be satisfied by adjusting the kind and content of the copolymerization component contained in the copolymerized polyester film. On the other hand, the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.0 × 10. 7 Above Pa, more preferably 1.0 × 10 8 Pa or more. The shrinkage of the coating film after heating at 120 ° C for 5 minutes is 3.0% or less, and preferably 2.5% or less. Since the shrinkage ratio is 3.0% or less, it has sufficient dimensional stability. Therefore, when it is laminated with the adhesive sheet, it can form a concave shape, a convex shape, or an uneven shape on the surface of the adhesive sheet. Furthermore, since the occurrence of wrinkles during processing can be suppressed, the wrinkles are not transferred to the adhesive sheet, and an adhesive sheet having a sufficient appearance can be produced. Among them, the shrinkage in the machine direction (MD) after heating at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes is preferably 3.0% or less, and more preferably 2.5% or less. On the other hand, the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% or more, and more preferably 0.5% or more. The shrinkage rate in a direction (TD) perpendicular to the mechanical direction after heating at 120 ° C for 5 minutes is preferably 1.0% or less, and more preferably 0.8% or less. On the other hand, the lower limit is preferably -1.0% or more, and more preferably -0.5% or more. From the viewpoint of preventing contamination caused by the adhesion of oligomers (cyclic terpolymers) to the mold during the molding process, the coating film is preferably applied after the heat treatment (180 ° C, 10 minutes). The extraction amount of the layer surface is 1.0 × 10 -3 mg / cm 2 Below, more preferably 5.0 × 10 -4 mg / cm 2 the following. When the extraction amount of the oligomer exceeds the above range, there may be a case where the contamination caused by the adhesion of the oligomer to the mold becomes severe during the molding process. As an example, in the process of continuous heating and forming for many times, the mold contamination is promoted due to the deposition of precipitated oligomers, so it is important to control the amount of oligomers deposited during heating. For these reasons, the smaller the amount of extraction of the oligomer, the better. [Manufacturing method of the present adhesive sheet laminated body] As an example of a method of producing the present adhesive sheet laminated body, for example, the following method may be mentioned: the adhesive composition is sandwiched between two coating portions I or II, and a bonding machine is used. Form an adhesive material layer. Moreover, as another method, the method of apply | coating an adhesive composition to the coating part I or II, and forming an adhesive material layer is mentioned. However, it is not limited to this manufacturing method. Examples of the method for applying the adhesive composition include conventionally known coating methods such as reverse roll coating, gravure coating, bar coating, and doctor blade coating. [The present shaped adhesive sheet laminate] The present shaped sheet laminate can be used to make a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 1 having an uneven shape formed on the surface of the adhesive layer as follows (referred to as "this shaped adhesive sheet" Laminated body 1 "). As shown in FIG. 3, the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body 1 can be made with the following components: it has an adhesive material layer 2, and can be laminated on one of the front and back surfaces of the adhesive material layer 2 in a peelable manner. The covering portion I formed on the side and the covering portion II formed on the other side of the front surface and the back surface of the adhesive material layer 2 in a peelable manner. The adhesive material layer 2 is provided on one side surface 2A of the front surface and the back surface. The concave portion, convex portion, or uneven portion (referred to as the "adhesive sheet surface uneven portion 2B"), and the other side surface 2C of the front surface and the back surface is a flat surface, and the covering portion I is in close contact with the front and back surfaces of the adhesive sheet One side surface 2A is provided with a concave portion, a convex portion, or an uneven portion (referred to as a "covered portion surface uneven portion 3B") on one of the front and back side surfaces 3A, and the sheet back surface 3C is provided with the above-mentioned adhesive sheet surface uneven portion 2B matches, in other words, convex, concave or convex portions forming concave and convex portions (referred to as "protective sheet back convex portion 3D"), and the covering portion II is along the front surface and the other side surface 2C of the adhesive sheet 2 Contains flat faces. In addition, the other side surface 2C of the front surface and the back surface can be made into a flat surface as shown in FIG. 3, and the other side surface 2C of the front surface and the back surface can also be formed with a concave portion, a convex portion, or an uneven portion. As shown in FIG. 2, the shaped adhesive sheet laminate 1 having such a structure can be integrated into one body by using the above-mentioned shaped adhesive sheet laminate to perform pressure forming, vacuum forming, pressure forming, or roll forming. It is manufactured by forming an uneven shape on the present adhesive sheet laminate. By manufacturing in the above manner, the uneven portions 2B on the adhesive sheet surface of the adhesive material layer 2, the uneven portions 3B on the protective sheet surface of the covering portion I, and the convex 3D portions on the back of the protective sheet 3 can be formed at the same positions to form unevenness. The adhesive material layer 2 can be used, for example, as a double-sided adhesive sheet for adhering two image display device constituent members (also referred to as “adhered bodies”) constituting the image display device. That is, the concave-convex portion 2B of the adhesive sheet surface in the adhesive layer 2 may correspond to the concave, convex, or concave-convex portion (referred to as "concave-convex portion on the surface of the adherend") in the bonding surface of the adherend. It is preferable to form into the same outline shape. Thereby, the uneven surface part 2B of the adhesive sheet surface in this shaped adhesive sheet laminated body 1 can be fitted with the uneven surface part of the surface of an adherend in an image display device component which is an adherend. Here, examples of the image display device include a liquid crystal display (LCD) and an organic EL (electroluminescence) display device (OLED (organic light emitting diode)). )), Electronic paper, microelectromechanical system (MEMS) displays and plasma display (PDP) smart phones, tablet terminals, mobile phones, televisions, game consoles, personal computers, car navigation systems, ATM (automatic teller machine, fish teller, etc. But it is not limited to these. In addition, the so-called image display device constituent member as an adherend is a member constituting such image display devices, and examples thereof include a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel. 1 can be used for bonding any two adherends selected from a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel. For example, it can be used for bonding a surface protection panel and a touch panel, or a touch panel and an image display panel. However, the adherend is not limited to these. <Manufacturing method> Here, the manufacturing method of this shaping | molding adhesive sheet laminated body 1 is demonstrated in detail. As described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the present adhesive sheet laminate 1 can be produced by heating and forming the present adhesive sheet laminate 1 in an integrated manner into an uneven shape. In this case, examples of the forming processing method include pressure forming, vacuum forming, pressure forming, forming using a roll, and forming using a laminate. Among these, from the viewpoint of moldability and processability, press molding is particularly preferred. A more detailed specific example will be described. The adhesive sheet laminated body is preheated by a heater, and the adhesive sheet laminated body is transported to a pressure forming machine at a stage of heating to a specific temperature, and a concave-convex shape equivalent to the printing step shape of the adherend is modeled in advance. The mold is press-processed and cooled at the same time, so that the mold shape can be transferred to one side of the present adhesive sheet laminate, and the original shaped adhesive sheet laminate 1 having unevenness formed on one side is manufactured. At this time, the preheating of the adhesive sheet laminate is preferably heated to a temperature at which the adhesive layer is softened, and specifically, it is preferably heated to 70 to 120 ° C. The material of the mold used for the concave-convex forming is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include resin-based materials such as silicone resin and fluororesin, and metal-based materials such as stainless steel and aluminum. Among them, metal molds capable of controlling the temperature at the time of forming are particularly preferable because high-precision formability is required for the concave-convex forming of the adherend. In addition, the cooling after the press working may be performed after the mold is opened, or the mold may be cooled in advance and cooled while being pressurized. Furthermore, in the present invention, conditions for forming such as pressing pressure and pressing time are not particularly specified, and may be appropriately adjusted according to the size or shape to be formed, the materials used, and the like. In addition, after the forming process, a Thomson blade, a rotary cutter, or the like can be used for cutting. [Manufacturing method of this shaped adhesive sheet laminated body] Next, a coating portion I having an adhesive material layer and being laminated on one surface of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner is provided, and one surface of the adhesive material is provided. A particularly preferred embodiment of a method for manufacturing a laminated adhesive sheet laminate having a configuration in which concave portions, convex portions, or uneven portions (called "concave and convex portions on the surface of an adhesive material layer") are formed will be described. The inventions related to the present manufacturing method 1 and the present manufacturing method 2 described below propose a high-precision concave-convex portion on the surface of the adhesive material layer that can be formed on the surface of the adhesive material layer with high accuracy, preferably A novel method for continuously forming a laminated body of shaped adhesive sheet. As an example of an embodiment of the present invention, a novel method for manufacturing a laminated body of shaped adhesive sheet (referred to as "this manufacturing method 1") is provided. A coating part I formed by laminating on one surface of the adhesive material layer and forming concave, convex, or uneven portions on the one surface of the adhesive material (referred to as "concave and convex portions on the surface of the adhesive material layer"). The manufacturing method is characterized in that it includes an adhesive material layer and a coating portion I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, and heating the adhesive sheet laminate to The adhesive sheet laminated body is formed and cooled to produce a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body, and the adhesive sheet laminated body is heated, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) in the coating portion I is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Forming was started in the state of Pa, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the covering part I was 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 In the state of Pa, forming is completed. In this manufacturing method 1, a novel manufacturing method of the above-mentioned shaped adhesive sheet laminate is further proposed. When the heated adhesive sheet laminate is formed, the cooled mold is used for forming. According to this manufacturing method 1, for example, after the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate is heated, the coating portion I starts to be formed in a specific state, and the coating portion I is finished to be formed in a specific state, so that the surface of the adhesive material layer can be highly accurate A concavo-convex shape corresponding to the concavo-convex portions on the surface of the adherend is formed. Furthermore, when the heated adhesive sheet laminate is molded, if the cooled mold is used for molding, the molding can be cooled and completed at the same time, so that the above-mentioned manufacturing method can be continuously performed. <This manufacturing method 1> This manufacturing method 1 is an example of the manufacturing method of the shape | molded adhesive sheet laminated body (it is called "this manufacturing method") which consists of heating the adhesive sheet laminated body described below (heating process) ). A manufacturing method of forming the heated adhesive sheet laminate and cooling (forming and cooling steps). This manufacturing method 1 may include other steps as long as it includes the heating step and the forming and cooling steps described above. For example, if necessary, it may include steps such as a heat treatment step, a conveying step, a cutting step, and a cutting step. It is not limited to these steps. (Adhesive sheet laminated body) The adhesive sheet laminated body as the starting member in this manufacturing method 1 may include an adhesive material layer and a coating portion I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, Other components may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, there can be exemplified a coating part I including an adhesive material layer, a peelable layer laminated on one of the front and back sides of the adhesive material layer, and a peelable laminated layer on the adhesive. Adhesive sheet laminate of coating part II formed on the front side and the back side of the material layer. However, whether or not the covering part II is provided is arbitrary, and a configuration in which the covering part II is not laminated may be adopted. The details of the laminated sheet are as described above. (Heating step) In this manufacturing method 1, it is preferable to heat the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate and set the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I to 1.0 × 10. 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 State of Pa. If the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I is in the above range, the coating portion I can be deformed to a degree suitable for molding, and the required unevenness can be accurately formed on the surface of the adhesive layer . From this viewpoint, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I be heated and adhered to the sheet laminate to be 1.0 × 10. 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 The state of Pa is more preferably 5.0 × 10. 6 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 9 The state below Pa is more preferably 1.0 × 10. 7 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 8 State below Pa. According to this, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the covering portion I is 1.0 × 10 for heating and adhering the sheet laminate. 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 Among them, it is more preferably set to 5.0 × 10. 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 The state of Pa is preferably set to 1.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 7 ~~ 5.0 × 10 8 Of the state. Here, in order to heat-adhere the sheet laminate, the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I is adjusted to be within the above range, and it can be adjusted according to the components or gel fraction of the composition constituting the coating portion I. Ratio, weight average molecular weight, etc., are adjusted by adjusting heating temperature. It is not limited to this method. Furthermore, it is more preferable to heat the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, and set the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I to 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus G '(S) of the adhesive layer is less than 1.0 × 10 4 State of Pa. If the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the coating portion I is adjusted to the above range, the effects as described above can be obtained. In addition, if the storage elastic modulus G' (S) of the adhesive material layer is less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, sufficient moldability can be imparted to the adhesive material layer. From this point of view, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the covering portion I be within the above-mentioned range and that the storage elastic modulus G' (S) of the adhesive material layer is not reached by heating the adhesive sheet laminate. 1.0 × 10 4 The state of Pa, preferably 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 3 A state of Pa or less, preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 3 State below Pa. According to this, it is more preferable to set the storage elastic modulus E '(M) of the covering part I to be the range described above for heating the adhesive sheet laminate, and the storage elastic modulus G' (S) of the adhesive layer to be 5.0 × 10. 1 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 The state below Pa is more preferably 1.0 × 10. 2 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 The state below Pa is preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 3 State below Pa. Here, the storage elastic modulus G '(S) of the adhesive material layer can be adjusted by adjusting the heating temperature according to the components, gel fraction, weight average molecular weight, etc. of the composition constituting the adhesive material layer. It is not limited to this method. Furthermore, it is particularly preferable that the value of the loss tangent tan δ of the adhesive material layer is 1.0 or more in order to heat the adhesive sheet laminate. The loss tangent tan δ will be described below. If the value of the loss tangent tanδ of the adhesive material layer is 1.0 or more, it is preferable that it has a degree of flexibility that can be formed. From this point of view, it is particularly preferable to heat the adhesive sheet laminate so that the value of the loss tangent tan δ of the adhesive layer becomes 1.0 or more, and among these, it is more preferable to make it 1.5 or 20 or less. In order to make it 3.0 or more or 10 or less. But the upper limit is not limited to this. In this manufacturing method 1, it is preferable to heat-adhere a sheet | seat laminated body so that the surface temperature of the coating part I may become 70-180 degreeC. If the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 ° C or more, the adhesive material layer is sufficiently softened and the coating portion I can be sufficiently deformed. If it is 180 ° C or less, the occurrence of wrinkles caused by heat shrinkage or heat can be suppressed. The disadvantages such as the decomposition of the adhesive material layer are caused, so it is better. From this viewpoint, it is preferable to heat the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate so that the surface temperature of the coating portion I becomes 70 to 180 ° C, more preferably 75 ° C or more or 150 ° C or less, and even more preferably It is 80 ° C or higher or 120 ° C or lower. Examples of the method for heating the adhesive sheet laminated body include a method in which the adhesive sheet laminated body is heated between the upper and lower heating plates provided with heating members such as electric heating heaters from above and below, or directly sandwiched between the heating plates. Holding method, a method using a heating roller, a method of immersing it in hot water, and the like. It is not limited to these methods. (Forming and cooling step) In this step, the heated adhesive sheet laminate is formed as described above, and the adhesive sheet laminate is cooled while being formed. That is, the adhesive sheet laminated body in which the laminated adhesive material layer and the coating part I are integrated into one body is directly formed. Thereby, the covering part I is formed by a mold, and at the same time, the adhesive material layer is also formed through the covering part I. In this step, the heated adhesive sheet laminate may be cooled after being formed, and may also be cooled while being formed. For example, by using a cooled mold to pressurize, forming and cooling can be performed simultaneously and ended at the same time. Thereby, this manufacturing method 1 can be continuously performed as described below. As the forming method, the forming method is not particularly limited as long as the uneven shape can be formed on the adhesive sheet laminate in an integrated manner. Examples include pressure forming, vacuum forming, pressure forming, forming using a roll, compression forming, and forming using a laminate. Among these, from the viewpoint of moldability and processability, press molding is particularly preferred. The material of the mold is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include resin-based materials such as silicone resin and fluororesin, and metal-based materials such as stainless steel and aluminum. Among them, metal molds capable of controlling the temperature at the time of forming are particularly preferable because high-precision formability is required for the concave-convex forming of the adherend. As the cooling method of the mold, a cooling method that is generally performed can be adopted. For example, water cooling or a cooling method using compressed air is mentioned. For a mold, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a specific concave-convex shape is set on the inner wall surface of at least one of the molds that are opened and closed in advance. The concave and convex shapes corresponding to the concave, convex, or concave and convex portions can be transferred to the adhesive sheet by pressure-molding, vacuum forming, pressure forming, or roll forming of the adhesive sheet laminate using the mold Laminated and shaped. In this step, preferably as described above, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the coating portion I in the adhesive sheet laminate is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 In the state of Pa, forming is started. Here, the "starting of molding" means, for example, when forming using a mold, it means that the mold is closed, that is, the sheet laminated body is pressed and adhered by the mold. If the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering part I is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 The range of Pa allows the coating portion I to be deformed to a degree suitable for molding, and it is possible to accurately shape the surface of the adhesive material layer with a desired uneven shape. From this viewpoint, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the coating portion I is 1.0 × 10. 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 In the state of Pa, the formation of the laminated sheet is started, and it is more preferably 5.0 × 10. 6 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 9 Forming starts at a state of Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 7 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 8 Forming is started in a state of Pa or less. According to this, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion I is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 In the state of Pa, the formation of the laminated sheet is started. Among them, it is more preferably 5.0 × 10. 6 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 6 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 Forming in the Pa state, preferably 1.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 7 ~ 5.0 × 10 8 In the state of Pa, forming is started. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the coating portion I is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive layer is less than 1.0 × 10 4 In the state of Pa, the forming of the laminated sheet is started. If the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering part I is in the above range, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. In addition, if the storage elastic modulus G' ( SS) less than 1.0 × 10 4 When the molding is started in the state of Pa, the molding can be performed in a state where the adhesive layer has more sufficient moldability. From this viewpoint, it is further preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion I is in the above range and the storage elastic modulus G' (SS) of the adhesive material layer does not reach 1.0 × 10 4 Forming is started in the Pa state, and it is further preferred that the G '(SS) is 5.0 × 10. 1 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 3 Forming starts at a state of Pa or less, and more preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 3 Forming is started in a state of Pa or less. According to this, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion I is in the above range and the storage elastic modulus G' (SS) of the adhesive layer is 5.0 × 10. 1 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 1 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 Forming is started in a state of Pa or less, and it is more preferably 1.0 × 10. 2 Above Pa and less than 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 5.0 × 10 3 Forming starts at Pa or less, preferably 1.0 × 10 2 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 3 Forming is started in a state of Pa or less. In addition, it is preferable to start molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C. If the surface temperature of the coating part I is 70 ° C or more, the adhesive material layer is sufficiently softened and the coating part I can be sufficiently deformed. If it is 180 ° C or less, the occurrence of wrinkles caused by heat shrinkage or the Defects such as decomposition of the adhesive layer caused by heat are preferred. Therefore, it is preferable to start the molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C. Among them, it is more preferable to make it 75 ° C or more or 150 ° C or less, and it is more preferable to make it 80 ° C or more or 120 ° C. Below ℃. On the other hand, in this step, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I is 5.0 × 10. 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 In the state of Pa, forming is completed. Here, the term "end forming" means ending the application of forming pressure to the adhesive sheet laminate, and if the forming is a mold, it means opening the mold. If the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating part I is 5.0 × 10 7 Above Pa and 1.0 × 10 10 A range of Pa or less is preferable because it has excellent shape stability after forming. From this viewpoint, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I is 5.0 × 10. 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Forming is completed in the state of Pa, more preferably 1.0 × 10 8 Above Pa or 8.0 × 10 9 Forming is completed in a state of Pa or less, more preferably 1.0 × 10 9 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 9 Forming is completed in a state of Pa or less. Accordingly, in this step, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I is 5.0 × 10. 7 ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 5.0 × 10 9 The forming is completed in the state of Pa. Among them, it is preferably 1.0 × 10. 8 ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 8 ~ 5.0 × 10 9 Forming is completed in the state of Pa, preferably 1.0 × 10 9 ~ 8.0 × 10 9 Pa, or 1.0 × 10 9 ~ 5.0 × 10 9 In the state of Pa, forming is completed. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I is in the above range and the storage elastic modulus G' (SF) of the adhesive material layer is 1.0 × 10. 4 Forming is completed in a state of Pa or more. If the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating part I is within the above range, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. In addition, if the storage elastic modulus G' of the adhesive layer is (SS) is 1.0 × 10 4 When the forming is completed in a state of Pa or more, the formed adhesive material layer can maintain the shape. From this viewpoint, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I is in the above range, and the storage elastic modulus G' (SF) of the adhesive material layer is 1.0 × 10. 4 The molding is completed in a state of Pa or more, and it is further preferred that the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer is 5.0 × 10. 4 Above Pa or 5.0 × 10 7 Forming is completed in a state of Pa or less, and it is more preferably 1.0 × 10. 4 Above Pa or 1.0 × 10 7 Forming is completed in a state of Pa or less. In addition, it is preferable to finish the forming in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is less than 50 ° C. For example, in the case of press molding, it is preferable to open the mold while the surface temperature is less than 50 ° C. If the surface temperature of the covering part I does not reach 50 ° C, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering part I is 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 The range of Pa is preferable because it can suppress deformation when the molded body is taken out after the completion of molding, or warpage due to thermal contraction of the coating portion I. From this point of view, it is preferable to finish the molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is less than 50 ° C. Among them, it is preferable to finish the molding in a state where it is 0 ° C or more or 45 ° C or less. The molding is completed in a state of 10 ° C or higher or 40 ° C or lower. Furthermore, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the coating portion I at the start of the molding and the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the coating portion I at the end of the molding satisfy the following relational expression (1) . (1) ·· E '(MF) / E' (MS) ≧ 1.3 Here, if the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the coating portion I and the storage elastic modulus of the coating portion I at the end of the molding are described above If E '(MF) satisfies the above-mentioned relational expression (1), it is soft to the extent that it can be formed at the beginning of forming, and it has the hardness that can maintain the formed shape after the end of forming, so it is preferable. From this point of view, E '(MF) / E' (MS) ≧ 1.3 is preferred, and 100′E ′ (MF) / E '(MS) or E' (MF) / E 'is further preferred. (MS) ≧ 3.0, with 50 ≧ E '(MF) / E' (MS) or E '(MF) / E' (MS) ≧ 5.0 being particularly preferred. However, the upper limit of E '(MF) / E' (MS) is not limited to this. In addition, it is preferable that the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I at the end of the molding and the storage elastic modulus G' (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding satisfy the following relational expression (2) . (2) ・ ・ E '(MF) / G' (SF) ≦ 1.0 × 10 7 Here, if the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion I at the end of the molding and the storage elastic modulus G' (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding satisfy the above-mentioned relational expression (2), The formed adhesive material layer can maintain the shape. From this viewpoint, it is preferable that E '(MF) / G' (SF) ≦ 1.0 × 10 7 Among them, it is further preferably 1.0 ≦ E '(MF) / G' (SF) or E '(MF) / G' (SF) ≦ 5.0 × 10 6 , Which is further preferably 1.0 × 10 1 ≦ E '(MF) / G' (SF) or E '(MF) / G' (SF) ≦ 1.0 × 10 6 . Although it is repeated, in this manufacturing method 1, the mold may be press-molded and cooled after the mold is opened, or the mold may be cooled in advance and cooled while being press-molded. In this way, if the mold is cooled in advance, and cooling is performed at the same time as the press molding, the molding and cooling can be completed at the same time. Thereby, the shaped adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to the next step immediately after the forming and cooling are completed, so the shaped adhesive sheet laminate can be continuously manufactured. When cooling is performed at the same time as the mold is formed, the surface temperature of the mold is preferably 0 to 50 ° C. If the surface temperature of the mold is below 50 ° C, the shape of the laminated sheet can be fixed in a short time, and the obtained molded body has good accuracy, and can suppress the warpage caused by thermal shrinkage during the cooling process after molding. It is preferable from this viewpoint. Therefore, the surface temperature of the mold is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 10 ° C or more or 40 ° C or less, and particularly preferably 15 ° C or more or 30 ° C or less. In addition, the conditions for press forming such as press pressure and press time are not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted according to the size or shape of the press, the materials used, and the like. (Others) The shaped adhesive sheet laminate obtained in the above-mentioned forming and cooling steps can be directly taken up, heat treated, or cut to a specific size and shape. When cutting, for example, a method of cutting using a Thomson blade or a rotary cutter can be cited. In this manufacturing method 1, it is preferable to continuously manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body. For example, the adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to a heating unit, such as a heater, in which the transportation is stopped for a specific time, or the heated adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to the molding after being heated while being transported. In a unit, such as a forming mold, in the forming unit, for example, pressurization through a cooled mold, cooling while forming, and then conveying it to the next unit as needed to continuously manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet Laminated body. <This Manufacturing Method 2> As an example of an embodiment of the present invention, a manufacturing method of a shaped adhesive sheet laminate (referred to as "this manufacturing method 2") is proposed. The shaped adhesive sheet laminate system includes an adhesive material. Layer and the covering part I formed by laminating on one surface of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, and forming concave, convex, or uneven portions on one surface of the adhesive material (referred to as "surface unevenness of the adhesive material layer") The manufacturing method is characterized in that it uses an adhesive sheet laminate having an adhesive material layer and a coating part I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner to heat and use The mold forms the heated adhesive sheet laminate to produce a shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and heats the adhesive sheet laminate, starting when the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C. After forming, after forming the surface temperature of the coating part I below 60 ° C., the shaped adhesive sheet laminate is taken out from the mold. According to this manufacturing method 2, by heating the adhesive sheet laminate, molding is started when the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C, and the surface temperature of the coating portion I is removed from the mold after the surface temperature reaches 60 ° C. The shaped adhesive sheet laminate is taken out, and for example, a concave-convex shape conforming to the concave-convex portion on the surface of the adherend can be accurately formed on the surface of the adhesive material layer. This manufacturing method 2 is a manufacturing method including the steps of heating an adhesive sheet laminate described below (heating step), forming the heated adhesive sheet laminate, and cooling (forming, cooling steps). This manufacturing method 2 may include other steps as long as it includes the heating step and the forming and cooling steps described above. For example, if necessary, it may include steps such as a heat treatment step, a conveying step, a cutting step, and a cutting step. It is not limited to these steps. (Adhesive sheet laminated body) The adhesive sheet laminated body as the starting member in the manufacturing method 2 may include an adhesive material layer and a covering portion I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, Other components may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, there can be exemplified a coating part I including an adhesive material layer, a peelable layer laminated on one of the front and back sides of the adhesive material layer, and a peelable laminated layer on the adhesive. Adhesive sheet laminate of coating part II formed on the front side and the back side of the material layer. However, whether or not the covering part II is provided is arbitrary, and a configuration in which the covering part II is not laminated may be adopted. The details of the laminated sheet are as described above. (Heating step) In this step, the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate is heated so that the surface temperature of the coating portion I becomes 70 to 180 ° C. If the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 ° C or more, the adhesive material layer is sufficiently softened and the coating portion I can be sufficiently deformed. If it is 180 ° C or less, the occurrence of wrinkles caused by heat shrinkage or heat can be suppressed. The disadvantages such as the decomposition of the adhesive material layer are caused, so it is better. From this viewpoint, it is preferable to heat the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate so that the surface temperature of the coating portion I becomes 70 to 180 ° C, more preferably 75 ° C or more or 150 ° C or less, and even more preferably It is 80 ° C or higher or 120 ° C or lower. According to this, it is more preferable to heat the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate so that the surface temperature of the coating portion I becomes 70 to 150 ° C or 70 to 120 ° C. Among these, it is more preferable to make it 75 to 150 ° C or 75 to 150 ° C. 120 ° C, preferably 80 to 150 ° C or 80 to 120 ° C. Examples of the method for heating the adhesive sheet laminated body include a method in which the adhesive sheet laminated body is heated between the upper and lower heating plates provided with heating members such as electric heating heaters from above and below, or directly sandwiched between the heating plates. Holding method, a method using a heating roller, a method of immersing it in hot water, and the like. It is not limited to these methods. (Forming and cooling step) In this step, it is preferred to start forming the sheet laminate by adhering the surface temperature of the coating portion I to 70 to 180 ° C. as described above. That is, it is preferable to directly shape the laminated adhesive sheet laminate in a state in which the laminated adhesive layer and the coating portion I are integrated into one body. Thereby, at the same time as the covering portion I is formed, the adhesive material layer can be formed through the covering portion I. In this step, the heated adhesive sheet laminate may be cooled after being formed, and may also be cooled while being formed. For example, by using a cooled mold to pressurize, forming and cooling can be performed simultaneously and ended at the same time. Thereby, the present manufacturing method 2 can be continuously performed as described below. As the forming method, the forming method is not particularly limited as long as the uneven shape can be formed on the adhesive sheet laminate in an integrated manner. Examples include pressure forming, vacuum forming, pressure forming, forming using a roll (roll forming), compression forming, and forming using a laminate. Among these, from the viewpoint of moldability and processability, press molding is particularly preferred. When forming using a mold, the material of the mold is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include resin-based materials such as silicone resin and fluororesin, and metal-based materials such as stainless steel and aluminum. Among them, metal molds capable of controlling the temperature at the time of forming are particularly preferable because high-precision formability is required for the concave-convex forming of the adherend. As the cooling method of the mold, a cooling method that is generally performed can be adopted. For example, water cooling or a cooling method using compressed air is mentioned. For a mold, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a specific concave-convex shape is set on the inner wall surface of at least one of the molds that are opened and closed in advance. The concave and convex shapes corresponding to the concave, convex, or concave and convex portions can be transferred to the adhesive sheet by pressure-molding, vacuum forming, pressure forming, or roll forming of the adhesive sheet laminate using the mold Laminated and shaped. As described above, it is preferable to start the molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C. If the surface temperature of the coating part I is 70 ° C or more, the adhesive material layer is sufficiently softened and the coating part I can be sufficiently deformed. If it is 180 ° C or less, the occurrence of wrinkles caused by heat shrinkage or the Defects such as decomposition of the adhesive layer caused by heat are preferred. Therefore, it is preferable to start the molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is 70 to 180 ° C. Among them, it is more preferable to make it 75 ° C or more or 150 ° C or less, and it is more preferable to make it 80 ° C or more or 120 ° C. Below ℃. On the other hand, in this step, it is preferable to finish the molding in a state where the surface temperature of the coating portion I is less than 60 ° C. For example, in the case of press molding, it is preferable to open the mold while the surface temperature is less than 60 ° C. Here, the term "end forming" means ending the application of forming pressure to the adhesive sheet laminate, and if the forming is a mold, it means opening the mold. If the surface temperature of the coating portion I is less than 60 ° C, it is preferable to prevent deformation of the molded body when the molded body is taken out after the completion of the molding, or warpage caused by the thermal contraction of the coating portion I, so it is preferable. From this viewpoint, it is preferable to finish the molding when the surface temperature of the coating portion I is less than 60 ° C. Among them, it is preferable to finish the molding at a temperature of 0 ° C or higher or 50 ° C or lower. The molding is completed in a state of 10 ° C or higher or 40 ° C or lower. Although it is repeated, in the second manufacturing method, the mold may be press-molded and cooled after the mold is opened, or the mold may be cooled in advance and cooled while being press-molded. In this way, if the mold is cooled in advance, and cooling is performed at the same time as the press molding, the molding and cooling can be completed at the same time. Thereby, the shaped adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to the next step immediately after the forming and cooling are completed, so the shaped adhesive sheet laminate can be continuously manufactured. In the case where cooling is performed while the mold is being formed, the surface temperature of the mold is preferably less than 60 ° C. If the surface temperature of the mold does not reach 60 ° C, the shape of the laminated sheet can be fixed in a short time, and the obtained molded body has good accuracy, and can suppress the warpage accompanying the thermal shrinkage during the cooling process after molding. It is preferable from this viewpoint. Therefore, the surface temperature of the mold is preferably less than 60 ° C, more preferably 0 ° C or more or 50 ° C or less, and even more preferably 10 ° C or more or 40 ° C or less. The difference between the surface temperature of the coating portion I at the start of molding and the end of molding is preferably 10 to 100 ° C, and more preferably 20 ° C or higher or 90 ° C or lower. With the difference in surface temperature of the coating portion I being 10 to 100 ° C., for example, when the uneven shape is transferred to the adhesive sheet laminate and shaped, the shaped adhesive sheet can be formed immediately after forming and cooling. The laminated body is conveyed to the next step, so that the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body can be continuously manufactured. In addition, the conditions for press forming such as press pressure and press time are not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted according to the size or shape of the press, the materials used, and the like. (Others) The shaped adhesive sheet laminate obtained in the above-mentioned forming and cooling steps can be directly taken up, heat treated, or cut to a specific size and shape. When cutting, for example, a method of cutting using a Thomson blade or a rotary cutter can be cited. In this manufacturing method 2, it is preferable to continuously manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body. For example, the adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to a heating unit, such as a heater, in which the transportation is stopped for a specific time, or the heated adhesive sheet laminate can be transported to the molding after being heated while being transported. In a unit, such as a forming mold, in the forming unit, for example, pressurization through a cooled mold, cooling while forming, and then conveying it to the next unit as needed to continuously manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet Laminated body. <Use> Here, an example of the use of this shaped adhesive sheet laminated body 1 is demonstrated. In recent years, with the popularization of mobile phones, smartphones, and tablet terminals, there are many cases where the image display unit is damaged due to a user's mistakenly dropping it. Especially when the image display device is a touch panel method, not only the display becomes difficult to observe due to damage, but also the touch panel operation itself cannot be performed due to physical obstacles or water infiltration, or it may cause a malfunction. . Therefore, there may be a case where maintenance is performed by replacing only the image display unit, that is, repair. In the maintenance of the image display device, an adhesive sheet is also used when installing a new image display section. Generally, repairs are performed manually by the repair operator, and the repair operator must be skilled. That is, if an unskilled person installs the image display unit through an adhesive sheet, air may enter the interior or the adhesive material may be squeezed out. On the other hand, if the shaped adhesive sheet laminate 1 is used, a step shape with high accuracy can be provided in advance. Therefore, for example, the adhesive material layer can be provided in advance corresponding to the model of the image display device. The step shape can greatly simplify the maintenance work, and can be implemented without the skill of the repair operator. As described above, the adhesive sheet laminate of the present invention can be usefully used for maintenance of an image display device. <Explanation of sentence> In this specification, when it is expressed as "X ~ Y" (X and Y are arbitrary numbers), if there is no special explanation, it means "above X and below Y", and also Contains the meaning of "preferably greater than X" or "preferably less than Y". In addition, when the expression is "above X" (X is an arbitrary number) or "below Y" (Y is an arbitrary number), it also includes "preferably greater than X" or "preferably less than Y" Meaning. In the present invention, the boundary between the sheet and the film is not determined. In the present invention, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two in terms of text. Therefore, in the present invention, the case of "film" also includes "sheet". In the case of "sheet", "film" is also included. EXAMPLES Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the examples. [Group 1 of Examples and Comparative Examples] <Coated Section 1-I> Among Examples 1-1 to 1-3 and Comparative Example 1-1 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "Group 1 of Examples and Comparative Examples") As the coating portion 1-I of the adhesive sheet laminate, the following coating portions 1-A to 1-D are used. The values of the respective storage elastic modulus are shown in Table 1.・ Coated part 1-A: A single-area layer of a biaxially stretched isophthalic acid copolymerized PET film (thickness: 75 μm) is a film composed of a release layer (thickness: 2 μm) of a polysiloxane compound.・ Coated part 1-B: The single-area layer of unstretched polyolefin film (thickness: 50 μm) containing 4-methylpentene-1 includes a release layer (thickness: 38 μm) of modified polyolefin and成 的 膜。 into the film.・ Coated part 1-C: A film containing a polyolefin film (thickness: 70 μm) containing unstretched polypropylene.・ Coated part 1-D: A single-layer layer of a biaxially-stretched homo-PET film (thickness: 75 μm) is a film composed of a release layer (thickness: 2 μm) of a polysiloxane compound. <Example 1-1> (Production of a double-sided adhesive sheet) A polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer (Tg: 105) having a number average molecular weight of 2400 as a (meth) acrylic copolymer (1-a) ℃) 15 parts by mass (18 mol%), 81 parts by mass (75 mol%) of butyl acrylate (Tg: -55 ° C) and 4 parts by mass (7 mol%) of acrylic acid (Tg: 106 ° C) Acrylic copolymer (1-a-1) (weight average molecular weight 230,000) 1 kg of glycerol dimethacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Oil Co., Ltd., product name: GMR) as a crosslinking agent (1-b) (1-b-1) 90 g and a mixture of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzophenone and 4-methylbenzophenone as a photopolymerization initiator (1-c) (Lanberti) Manufactured, product name: Esacure TZT) (1-c-1) 15 g of the resin composition 1-1 used for uniformly mixing to prepare an adhesive layer. The glass transition temperature of the obtained resin composition was -5 ° C. The obtained resin composition 1-1 was sandwiched between a release-treated PET film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., product name: Diafoil MRV-V06, thickness: 100 μm) and two pieces of the coating portion 1-A, and used The laminator was shaped into a sheet shape so that the thickness of the resin composition 1-1 was 100 μm, and an adhesive sheet laminate 1-1 was produced. The release layer side of the coating portion 1-A is disposed so as to be in contact with the resin composition 1-1. The obtained adhesive sheet laminate 1-1 was formed by using a vacuum pressure forming machine (manufactured by Daiichi Sangyo Co., Ltd., FKS-0632-20) and thermoforming by the following process to produce a shaped adhesive sheet laminate.体 1-1. That is, by preheating an IR heater at 400 ° C, the surface of the adhesive sheet laminate 1-1 is heated to 100 ° C, and then a forming mold cooled to 25 ° C is used under the condition of a clamping pressure of 8 MPa. It was press-molded for 5 seconds, and the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body 1-1 which formed the unevenness | corrugation on the surface was produced. <Example 1-2> Except that the coating portion 1-B was used instead of the coating portion 1-A, in the same manner as in Example 1-1, an adhesive sheet laminate 1-2 and a shaped adhesive sheet were produced. Laminated body 1-2. <Example 1-3> Except that the coating portion 1-C was used in place of the coating portion 1-A, in the same manner as in Example 1-1, an adhesive sheet laminate 1-3 and a shaped adhesive sheet were produced. Laminates 1-3. <Comparative Example 1-1> Except that the coating portion 1-D was used instead of the coating portion 1-A, in the same manner as in Example 1-1, an adhesive sheet laminate 1-4 and a shaped adhesive sheet were produced. Laminates 1-4. <Measurement and Evaluation Methods> The measurement methods and evaluation methods of various physical property values of the samples obtained in Examples 1-1 to 1-3 and Comparative Example 1-1 will be described. (Elastic Modulus of Covering Part) The covering parts 1-A to 1-D used in the group of Example 1 and Comparative Example 1 were cut into a length of 50 mm and a width of 4 mm, respectively, using a dynamic viscoelastic device (IT Meter and Control Co., Ltd.'s DVA-200) was measured with a chuck pitch of 25 mm and a deformation of 1%. The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. The value of the storage elastic modulus at 100 ° C of the obtained data is set to E '(MA), and the value of the storage elastic modulus at 30 ° C is set to E' (MB). (Elastic Modulus of Adhesive Material Layer) The adhesive material layers obtained in Group 1 of Examples and Comparative Examples were overlapped and laminated to a thickness of 1 mm, and were measured using a rheometer (MARSII manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific). The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. Set the value of the storage elastic modulus at 100 ° C of the obtained data to G '(SA) and the value of the loss elastic modulus to G''(SA). The storage elastic modulus at 30 ° C The value of the number is set to G '(SB), the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G''(SB), and the value of G''/G' at each temperature is set to the loss tangent of each adhesive layer. tan δ (SA, SB). (Gel Fraction) The gel fraction of the adhesive material layer is about 0.05 g of the adhesive material layer obtained in Example 1 and Comparative Example 1, respectively. The SUS screen (#) of the mass (X) is measured in advance. 200) The package is in the shape of a bag, and the mouth of the bag is closed and folded. After measuring the quality (Y) of the package, it is immersed in 100 ml of ethyl acetate, and stored in a dark place at 23 ° C for 24 hours, then the package is removed It was heated at 70 ° C for 4.5 hours to evaporate the attached ethyl acetate, the mass (Z) of the dried package was measured, and the obtained mass was substituted into the following formula to obtain it. Gel fraction [%] = [(Z-X) / (Y-X)] × 100 (Formability) In order to confirm the formability, the molds described in the examples and comparative examples were used to form the group 1 below. test. That is, as shown in FIG. 5, the mold above and below is a convex mold having a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm. The other mold above and below is an aluminum having a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm. flat. For the forming surface of the above convex mold, as shown in FIG. 5, a convex portion of 187 mm in length, 125 mm in width, and 1 mm in height was provided at the center, and further, the depth of the forming surface of the convex portion was 25 μm, 50 μm. , 75 μm, 100 μm, four shaped concave portions (89 mm in length, 58 mm in width) in plan view. The covering portions 1-A to 1-D of the shaped adhesive sheet laminate formed with irregularities obtained by the method described in Group 1 of Examples and Comparative Examples were peeled off, and a scanning white interference microscope was used to separate The non-contact method measures the height of the concave portion corresponding to the printing step and the convex portion corresponding to the display surface. Measure the height h of the convex part (the boundary part between the concave part) and the mold depth of 100 μm. Measure the transfer rate of 50% or more derived from the following calculation formula as ○, and evaluate the transfer rate of less than 50%. Is ×. Transfer rate (%) = h (formed body height) / 100 (die depth) x 100 (peeling force) The adhesive sheet laminates produced in the group 1 of the examples and comparative examples were cut to a length of 150 mm and a width 50 mm, the 180 ° peel test was performed on the interface between the coated portion 1-A to 1-D and the adhesive material layer at a test speed of 300 mm / min. Set the peeling force at 30 ° C as F (C), heat it at 100 ° C for 5 minutes, and let it cool naturally to 30 ° C. Set the peeling force to F (D), and use the obtained values as coatings, respectively. Peeling force of parts 1-A to 1-D. Table 1 shows the evaluation results of the adhesive sheet laminates 1-1 to 1-4 and the shaped adhesive sheet laminates 1-1 to 1-4 obtained in the examples and comparative examples. [Table 1] Based on the results of Table 1 and Figure 4 and the test results so far, it was confirmed that, as shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-3, the storage elastic modulus E '(MB) at 30 ° C was 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa and storage elastic modulus E '(MA) at 100 ° C is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 The coating portion of Pa is laminated on the adhesive material layer to form the concave-convex shape on the adhesive material layer with high accuracy. On the other hand, as shown in Comparative Example 1-1, when a biaxially stretched homopolymer PET film that is generally widely used is used as a release film, the storage elastic modulus of the coated portion exceeds 2.0 × even in a high temperature range. 10 9 Pa, so that sufficient unevenness cannot be formed in the adhesive material layer even if thermoforming is performed. From this we know that the storage elastic modulus E '(MB) at 5.0 ° C is 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 Pa and storage elastic modulus E '(MA) at 100 ° C is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 The coating portion of Pa is laminated and formed on the adhesive material layer, and a shaped adhesive sheet formed with unevenness can be obtained well. It is also known that by using it, it is better to satisfy the condition that the loss tangent tanδ (A) of the adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is 1.0 or more and that the loss tangent tanδ (B) of the adhesive material layer at 30 ° C does not reach 1.0 The conditions of the adhesive sheet laminate can achieve more accurate shaping. Therefore, it was confirmed that by using the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, the unevenness equivalent to the printing step of the image display device that becomes the adherend can be accurately formed, and there can be no gap between the adherend and the adherend. Moreover, even if the adhesive material in the adherend with a narrow edge design such as the printing part can be used without any overflow, it can form and adhere to the shaped adhesive sheet laminate for image display devices. In terms of peeling force, the heating and cooling conditions when measuring the peeling force F (D), that is, the conditions for heating to 100 ° C for 5 minutes and then naturally cooling to 30 ° C are the conditions when the shaped adhesive sheet laminate is produced. Typical heating and cooling conditions. Since the absolute values of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) in the above examples are both 0.1 N / cm or less, the covering portions 1-A to 1- in the shaped adhesive sheet laminate are confirmed. The peeling force of D is the same as the peeling force of the coated portions 1-A to 1-D in the adhesive sheet laminate. [Group 2 of Examples and Comparative Examples] <Coated Section 2-I> Examples 2-1 to 2-4 and Comparative Example 2-1 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "group 2 of Examples and Comparative Examples") The coating part I of the adhesive sheet laminate is a release layer (thickness: 2 μm) containing a polysiloxane compound as a single-area layer for a biaxially-stretched isophthalic acid copolymerized PET film (thickness: 75 μm). And made into a film. The values of the respective storage elastic modulus are shown in Table 2. <Example 2-1> (Production of a double-sided adhesive sheet) A polymethylmethacrylate macromonomer (Tg: 105) having a number average molecular weight of 2400 as a (meth) acrylic copolymer (2-a) ℃) 15 parts by mass (18 mol%), 81 parts by mass (75 mol%) of butyl acrylate (Tg: -55 ° C) and 4 parts by mass (7 mol%) of acrylic acid (Tg: 106 ° C) Acrylic copolymer (2-a-1) (weight average molecular weight: 230,000) 1 kg of glycerol dimethacrylate as a cross-linking agent (2-b) (manufactured by Nippon Oil Company, product name: GMR) (2-b-1) 90 g, and a mixture of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzophenone and 4-methylbenzophenone as a photopolymerization initiator (2-c) (Lanberti) Manufacture, product name: Esacure TZT) (2-c-1) 15 g are mixed uniformly, and the resin composition 2-1 used to make the adhesive layer is produced. The glass transition temperature of the obtained resin composition was -5 ° C. The obtained resin composition 2-1 was sandwiched between a release-treated PET film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., product name: Diafoil MRV-V06, thickness: 100 μm) and two pieces of the coating portion 2-I, and used The laminator was formed into a sheet shape so that the thickness of the resin composition 2-1 became 100 μm, and an adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 was produced. In addition, the release layer side of the coating part 2-I was arrange | positioned so that it might contact the resin composition 2-1. The obtained adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 was formed by using a vacuum pressure forming machine (manufactured by Daiichi Sangyo Co., Ltd., FKS-0632-20) and a forming mold to perform thermoforming by the following process, Adhesive sheet laminate 2-1. As for the forming mold, as shown in FIG. 5, the upper and lower molds are convex molds with a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm, and the other molds are aluminum flat plates with a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm. . For the forming surface of the above convex mold, as shown in FIG. 5, a convex portion of 187 mm in length, 125 mm in width, and 1 mm in height was provided at the center, and further, the depth of the forming surface of the convex portion was 25 μm, 50 μm. , 75 μm, 100 μm, four shaped concave portions (89 mm in length, 58 mm in width) in plan view. An IR heater having a preheating temperature of 400 ° C. was used to heat the surface of the covering portion 2-I of the adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 to 100 ° C., and the molding was performed. That is, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coating portion 2-I is 2.1 × 10. 8 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive layer is 2.9 × 10 2 In the state of Pa, using a mold for cooling the surface temperature of the mold to 30 ° C, press molding under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa for 5 seconds, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF in the coating portion 2-I ) Is 2.8 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive layer is 6.1 × 10 4 The mold was opened in the state of Pa, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. In addition, the ratio E '(MS) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MS) of the coating portion 2-I at the start of the molding to the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of the molding is described. MF) / E '(MS) is 13.3. The ratio E '(MF) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the covering portion 2-I at the end of the molding to the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding. G '(SF) is 4.6 × 10 4 . The loss tangent tan δ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of molding was 4.8, and the loss tangent tan δ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of molding was 0.6. <Example 2-2> For the adhesive sheet laminated body 2-1 used in Example 2-1, an IR heater having a preheating of 400 ° C. was used to heat the coated portion 2 of the adhesive sheet laminated body 2-2. The surface of -I reaches 110 ° C and is formed. That is, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coating portion 2-I is 1.3 × 10. 8 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive layer is 9.6 × 10 1 In the state of Pa, using a mold for cooling the surface temperature of the mold to 30 ° C, press molding under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa for 5 seconds, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF in the coating portion 2-I ) Is 2.8 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive layer is 6.1 × 10 4 The mold was opened in the state of Pa, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 2-2 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. <Example 2-3> For the adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 used in Example 2-1, an IR heater having a preheating of 400 ° C. was used to heat the coated portion 2 of the adhesive sheet laminate 2-3. The surface of -I reaches 90 ° C and is formed. That is, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coated portion 2-I is 3.5 × 10. 8 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive layer is 8.9 × 10 2 In the state of Pa, using a mold for cooling the surface temperature of the mold to 30 ° C, press molding under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa for 5 seconds, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF in the coating portion 2-I ) Is 2.8 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive layer is 6.1 × 10 4 In the Pa state, the mold was opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 2-3 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. In addition, the ratio E '(MS) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MS) of the coating portion 2-I at the start of the molding to the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of the molding is described. MF) / E '(MS) was 8.0. The ratio E '(MF) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the covering portion 2-I at the end of the molding to the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding. G '(SF) is 4.6 × 10 4 . The loss tangent tan δ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of forming was 2.7, and the loss tangent tan δ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of forming was 0.6. <Example 2-4> For the adhesive sheet laminate 2-1 used in Example 2-1, an IR heater having a preheating of 400 ° C. was used to heat the covering portion 2 of the adhesive sheet laminate 2-4. The surface of -I reaches 70 ° C and is formed. That is, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coating portion 2-I is 1.9 × 10. 9 Pa and the storage modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive layer is 6.4 × 10 3 In the state of Pa, a forming mold was used to cool the surface temperature of the mold to 25 ° C., and press molding was performed for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa, and the storage elastic modulus E ′ (MF ) Is 2.8 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive layer is 6.1 × 10 4 The mold was opened in the state of Pa, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 2-4 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. In addition, the ratio E '(MS) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MS) of the coating portion 2-I at the start of the molding to the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of the molding is described. MF) / E '(MS) is 1.4. The ratio E '(MF) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the covering portion 2-I at the end of the molding to the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding. G '(SF) is 4.6 × 10 4 . The loss tangent tan δ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of molding was 1.4, and the loss tangent tan δ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of molding was 0.6. <Comparative Example 2-1> The adhesive sheet laminated body 2-1 used in Example 2-1 was heated to the covering portion 2 of the adhesive sheet laminated body 2-5 using an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C. The surface of -I reaches 60 ° C and is formed. That is, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coating portion 2-I is 2.4 × 10. 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SS) of the adhesive material layer is 1.3 × 10 4 In the state of Pa, a forming mold was used to cool the surface temperature of the mold to 25 ° C., and press molding was performed for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa, and the storage elastic modulus E ′ (MF ) Is 2.8 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive layer is 6.1 × 10 4 In the Pa state, the mold was opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 2-5 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. In addition, the ratio E '(MS) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MS) of the coating portion 2-I at the start of the molding to the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of the molding is described. MF) / E '(MS) is 1.2. The ratio E '(MF) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the covering portion 2-I at the end of the molding to the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding. G '(SF) is 4.6 × 10 4 . The loss tangent tan δ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of molding was 1.1, and the loss tangent tan δ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of molding was 0.6. In addition, the ratio E '(MS) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MS) of the coating portion 2-I at the start of the molding to the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of the molding is described. MF) / E '(MS) was 8.0. The ratio E '(MF) of the storage elastic modulus E' (MF) of the covering portion 2-I at the end of the molding to the storage elastic modulus G '(SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of the molding. G '(SF) is 9.7 × 10 3 . The loss tangent tan δ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of molding was 0.6, and the loss tangent tan δ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of molding was 0.6. <Measurement and Evaluation Methods> The measurement methods and evaluation methods of various physical property values of the samples obtained in Examples 2-1 to 2-4 and Comparative Example 2-1 will be described. (Elastic Modulus of Covering Part) The storage elastic modulus E '(MS) and E' (MF) of the covering part 2-I are cut into a length of 50 mm and a width of 4 mm, using a dynamic viscoelastic device (IT Meter and Control Co., Ltd.'s DVA-200) was measured with a chuck pitch of 25 mm and a deformation of 1%. The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. In the examples and comparative examples, the value of the storage elastic modulus at the temperature at the start of molding was set to E '(MS), and the value of the storage elastic modulus at the temperature at the end of each molding was set to E' (MF). Furthermore, in Example 2-1, since the temperature at the start of molding was 100 ° C, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of Example 2-1 is the storage elastic modulus E' (MA at 100 ° C). ). In addition, since the temperature at the end of forming in Group 2 of the Examples and Comparative Examples is 30 ° C, the E '(MF) and the storage elastic modulus at 30 ° C of the Group 2 of any of the Examples and Comparative Examples are all E '(MB) is the same. (Elastic Modulus of Adhesive Material Layer) The adhesive material layers obtained in Group 2 of Examples and Comparative Examples were superimposed and laminated to a thickness of 1 mm, and measured using a rheometer (MARSII manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific). The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. In the obtained data, the value of the storage elastic modulus at 100 ° C is set to G '(SA), the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G''(SA), and the storage elastic modulus at 30 ° C is set. The value of the number is set to G '(SB), the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G''(SB), and the value of G''/G' at each temperature is set to the loss tangent of each adhesive layer. tan δ (SA, SB). On the other hand, regarding the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) and G' (SB) of the adhesive material layer, the adhesive material layers obtained in the group 2 of the examples and comparative examples were superimposed and laminated to a thickness of 1 mm, and used A rheometer (MARSII manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific) was used for measurement. The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. In the obtained data, the value of the storage elastic modulus at the temperature at the start of each forming of the group 2 of the example and the comparative example is set to G '(SS), and the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G'' (SS), the value of the storage elastic modulus at the temperature at the end of each forming is G '(SF), the value of the loss elastic modulus is G''(SF), and further, the The value of G ″ / G ′ is set as the loss tangent tan δ (SS, SF) of each adhesive material layer. (Gel Fraction) Regarding the gel fraction of the adhesive material layer, about 0.05 g of the adhesive material layer obtained in Example 2 and Comparative Example 2 was collected, and the mass (X) of the SUS screen ( # 200) The package is in the shape of a bag, and the mouth of the bag is closed and folded. After measuring the mass (Y) of the package, it is immersed in 100 ml of ethyl acetate, stored in a dark place at 23 ° C for 24 hours, and then taken out. The package was heated at 70 ° C for 4.5 hours to evaporate the attached ethyl acetate. The mass (Z) of the dried package was measured, and the obtained mass was substituted into the following formula to obtain it. Gel fraction [%] = [(Z-X) / (Y-X)] × 100 (moldability) The shaped adhesive sheet formed with unevenness obtained in the group 2 of Examples and Comparative Examples was laminated. The covering portion I of the body was peeled off, and the height of the concave portion corresponding to the printing step and the convex portion corresponding to the display surface were measured in a non-contact manner using a scanning white interference microscope, respectively. Measure the height h of the convex part (the boundary part between the concave part) and the mold depth of 100 μm. Measure the transfer rate of 50% or more derived from the following calculation formula as ○, and evaluate the transfer rate of less than 50%. Is ×. Transfer rate (%) = h (molded body height) / 100 (die depth) × 100 (peeling force) The adhesive sheet laminates produced in the group 2 of the examples and comparative examples were cut to a length of 150 mm and a width 50 mm, the 180 ° peel test was performed on the interface between the coated portion 2-I and the adhesive material layer at a test speed of 300 mm / min. Set the peeling force at 30 ° C as F (C), heat it at 100 ° C for 5 minutes, and let it cool naturally to 30 ° C. Set the peeling force to F (D), and use the obtained values as coatings, respectively. Peeling force of part 2-I. Table 2 shows the evaluation results of the shaped adhesive sheet laminates 2-1 to 2-5 obtained in Examples 2-1 to 2-4 and Comparative Example 2-1. [Table 2] Based on the results of Table 2 and FIG. 4 and the test results thus far, it was confirmed that the storage elastic modulus E of the coating portion 2-I at the start of molding was shown in Examples 2-1 to 2-4. '(MS) is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of molding becomes 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 The method of Pa is adjusted and formed, and the uneven shape can be accurately formed on the adhesive material layer. On the other hand, as shown in Comparative Example 2-1, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion 2-I at the start of molding is greater than 2.0 × 10 9 In the case of Pa, even if thermoforming is performed, sufficient unevenness cannot be formed in the adhesive material layer. From this, it is known that the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion 2-I at the start of molding is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I at the end of molding becomes 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 The method of Pa is adjusted and formed, and a shaped adhesive sheet formed with irregularities can be obtained well. It is also known that by further satisfying the condition that the loss tangent tanδ (SS) of the adhesive material layer at the start of forming is 1.0 or more and satisfying the loss tangent tanδ (SF) of the adhesive material layer at the end of forming is less than 1.0 The conditions and methods are adjusted and shaped to achieve higher precision shaping. Therefore, it was confirmed that by using the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, the unevenness equivalent to the printing step of the image display device that becomes the adherend can be accurately formed, and there can be no gap between the adherend and the adherend. Moreover, even if the adhesive material in the adherend with a narrow edge design such as the printing part can be used without any overflow, it can form and adhere to the shaped adhesive sheet laminate for image display devices. In terms of peeling force, the heating and cooling conditions when measuring the peeling force F (D), that is, the conditions for heating to 100 ° C for 5 minutes and then naturally cooling to 30 ° C are the conditions when the shaped adhesive sheet laminate is produced. Typical heating and cooling conditions. Since the absolute values of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) in the above examples are both 0.1 N / cm or less, it is confirmed that the peeling force hardly changes before and after heating. Furthermore, it was learned that by laminating the sheet laminate by heating, the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) at the coating portion 2-I was 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Forming starts in the Pa state, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the coating portion 2-I is 5.0 × 10 7 ~ 1.0 × 10 10 The forming is completed in the state of Pa, and an uneven shape corresponding to the uneven portion on the surface of the adherend can be formed on the surface of the adhesive layer with high accuracy. [Group 3 of Examples and Comparative Examples] <Coated Section 3-I> Examples 3-1 to 3-3 and Comparative Examples 3-1 to 3-2 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "group of Examples and Comparative Examples" 3 ″) The coating part 3-I of the adhesive sheet laminate is used as a single-layer layer of a biaxially stretched isophthalic acid copolymerized PET film (thickness: 75 μm) containing a release layer of a polysiloxane compound (Thickness: 2 μm). The values of the respective storage elastic modulus are shown in Table 3. <Example 3-1> (Production of double-sided adhesive sheet) A polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer (Tg: 105) having a number average molecular weight of 2400 as a (meth) acrylic copolymer (3-a) ℃) 15 parts by mass (18 mol%), 81 parts by mass (75 mol%) of butyl acrylate (Tg: -55 ° C) and 4 parts by mass (7 mol%) of acrylic acid (Tg: 106 ° C) Acrylic copolymer (3-a-1) (weight average molecular weight 230,000) 1 kg of glycerol dimethacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Oil Co., Ltd., product name: GMR) as a crosslinking agent (3-b) (3-b-1) 90 g and a mixture of 2,4,6-trimethylbenzophenone and 4-methylbenzophenone as a photopolymerization initiator (3-c) (Lanberti) Production, product name: Esacure TZT) (3-c-1) 15 g of resin composition 3-1 used for uniformly mixing to prepare an adhesive layer. The glass transition temperature of the obtained resin composition was -5 ° C. The obtained resin composition 3-1 was sandwiched between a release-treated PET film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., product name: Diafoil MRV-V06, thickness: 100 μm) and two pieces of the coating portion 3-I, and used The laminator was formed into a sheet shape so that the thickness of the resin composition 3-1 became 100 μm, and an adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 was produced. In addition, the release layer side of the coating portion 3-I is arranged so as to be in contact with the resin composition 3-1. The obtained adhesive sheet laminated body 3-1 was formed by using a vacuum pressure forming machine (manufactured by Daiichi Industries, FKS-0632-20) and a forming mold by thermoforming in the following process. Adhesive sheet laminate 3-1. As for the forming mold, as shown in FIG. 5, the upper and lower molds are convex molds with a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm, and the other molds are aluminum flat plates with a length of 270 mm, a width of 170 mm, and a thickness of 40 mm. . For the forming surface of the above convex mold, as shown in FIG. 5, a convex portion of 187 mm in length, 125 mm in width, and 1 mm in height was provided at the center, and further, the depth of the forming surface of the convex portion was 25 μm, 50 μm. , 75 μm, 100 μm, four shaped concave portions (89 mm in length, 58 mm in width) in plan view. An IR heater having a preheating temperature of 400 ° C was used to heat the surface of the covering portion 3-I of the adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 to 100 ° C, and a molding mold was used to cool the mold surface temperature to 30 ° C. The laminated sheet 3-1 in the heated state is pressed for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa, and then the mold is opened to produce a shaped adhesive sheet layered body 3-1 formed by forming irregularities on the surface. . 〈Example 3-2〉 Using an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C, the adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 used in Example 3-1 was heated to the coating portion 3 of the adhesive sheet laminate 3-2. The surface of -I reaches 70 ° C. Using a forming mold that cools the surface temperature of the mold to 30 ° C, the heated laminated sheet 3-1 is pressed for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa. Then, the mold was opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 3-2 formed by forming irregularities on the surface was produced. 〈Example 3-3〉 Using an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C, the adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 used in Example 3-1 was heated to the coating portion 3 of the adhesive sheet laminate 3-3. The surface of -I reaches 100 ° C. Using a molding mold whose surface temperature is adjusted to 50 ° C, the heated laminated sheet 3-1 is press-formed for 5 seconds under a clamping pressure of 8 MPa. Then, the mold is opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 3-3 formed by forming irregularities on the surface is produced. <Comparative Example 3-1> Using an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C, the adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 used in Example 3-1 was heated to the coating portion 3 of the adhesive sheet laminate 3-5. The surface of -I reaches 60 ° C. Using a forming mold that cools the surface temperature of the mold to 30 ° C, the heated laminated sheet 3-1 is press-molded under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa for 5 seconds. Then, the mold is opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 3-4 formed by forming irregularities on the surface is produced. <Comparative Example 3-2> Using an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C, the adhesive sheet laminate 3-1 used in Example 3-1 was heated to the coating portion 3 of the adhesive sheet laminate 3-5. The surface of -I reaches 100 ° C. Using a forming mold whose surface temperature is adjusted to 80 ° C, the laminated sheet 3-1 in the heated state is press-molded for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa. Then, the mold is opened, and a shaped adhesive sheet laminate 3-5 formed by forming irregularities on the surface is produced. <Measurement and Evaluation Methods> The measurement methods and evaluation methods of various physical property values of the samples obtained in Examples 3-1 to 3-3 and Comparative Examples 3-1 to 3-2 will be described. (Elastic Modulus of Covered Part) The storage elastic modulus of Covered Part 3-I is cut into a length of 50 mm and a width of 4 mm, and a dynamic viscoelastic device (DVA-200 from IT Meter and Control Co., Ltd.) is used to clamp The measurement was performed with a head pitch of 25 mm and a deformation of 1%. The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. In the obtained data, the value of the storage elastic modulus of the coating portion 3-I at 30 ° C is set to E '(MB), and the value of the storage elastic modulus of the coating portion 3-I at 100 ° C is set E '(MA). (Elastic Modulus of Adhesive Material Layer) The adhesive material layers obtained in Group 3 of the Examples and Comparative Examples were overlapped and laminated to a thickness of 1 mm, and measured using a rheometer (MARSII manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific). The measurement was performed under conditions of a measurement temperature range of -50 ° C to 150 ° C, a frequency of 1 Hz, and a temperature increase rate of 3 ° C / min. In the obtained data, the value of the storage elastic modulus at 100 ° C is set to G '(SA), the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G''(SA), and the storage elastic modulus at 30 ° C is set. The value of the number is set to G '(SB), the value of the loss elastic modulus is set to G''(SB), and the value of G''/G' at each temperature is set to the loss tangent of each adhesive layer. tan δ (SA, SB). (Formability) The coated part I of the shaped adhesive sheet laminate having irregularities obtained in the group 3 of the examples and comparative examples was peeled off, and each was measured in a non-contact manner using a scanning white interference microscope. The height of the concave portion of the step and the convex portion corresponding to the display surface. Measure the height h of the convex part (the boundary part between the concave part) and the depth of the mold of 100 μm, and evaluate the transfer rate derived from the following calculation formula to be 50% or more and "50" and less than 50% The evaluation was “×”. Transfer rate (%) = h (molded body height) / 100 (die depth) × 100 (warpage, bending) The adhesive sheet laminate produced under each molding condition of the group 3 of the examples and comparative examples was cut out Form a square with a length of 100 mm, and measure the height of each vertex. The obtained 4 points were averaged and the value was used as the warpage. Those with a warpage height of less than 10 mm were judged as "○", and those with a warpage height of 10 mm or more were judged as "×". (Peeling force) The adhesive sheet laminates produced in Group 3 of Examples and Comparative Examples were cut into a length of 150 mm and a width of 50 mm, and the interface between the coating portion 3-I and the adhesive material layer was tested at a speed of 300 mm / A 180 ° peel test was performed in min. Set the peeling force at 30 ° C as F (C), heat it at 100 ° C for 5 minutes, and let it cool naturally to 30 ° C. Set the peeling force to F (D), and use the obtained values as coatings, respectively. Part 3-I peeling force. Table 3 shows the evaluation results of the shaped adhesive sheet laminates 3-1 to 3-5 obtained in Examples 3-1 to 3-3 and Comparative Examples 3-1 to 3-2. [table 3] Based on the results in Table 3 and the test results thus far, it was confirmed that the surface temperature of the coated portion 3-I was 70 to 180 ° C as shown in Example 3-1 to Example 3-3. The molding is completed after the surface temperature of the coating portion 3-I becomes less than 60 ° C., and the molding is performed by taking out the molded product from the mold, and the uneven shape can be accurately formed on the adhesive material layer. On the other hand, as shown in Comparative Example 3-1, if the temperature of the coating portion 3-I at the start of molding does not reach 70 ° C, sufficient unevenness cannot be formed in the adhesive material layer even if thermoforming is performed. It was also found that, as shown in Comparative Example 3-2, if the surface temperature of the coating portion 3-I is 70 ° C or higher when the molding is finished and the molded product is taken out from the mold, the molded product may be warped due to thermal contraction of the sheet. Warping or bending is not good. From this, it is known that, in order to perform unevenness shaping with higher accuracy, it is preferable to start the molding with the surface temperature of the coated portion 3-I at 70 to 180 ° C, and the surface temperature of the coated portion 3-I becomes unsettled. After reaching 60 ° C, the molding was completed, and the molding was performed by taking out the molded product from the mold. Therefore, it was confirmed that by using the above-mentioned adhesive sheet laminate, the unevenness equivalent to the printing step of the image display device that becomes the adherend can be accurately formed, and there can be no gap between the adherend and the adherend. Moreover, even if the adhesive material in the adherend with a narrow edge design such as the printing part can be used without any overflow, it can form and adhere to the shaped adhesive sheet laminate for image display devices. In terms of peeling force, the heating and cooling conditions when measuring the peeling force F (D), that is, the conditions for heating to 100 ° C for 5 minutes and then naturally cooling to 30 ° C are the conditions when the shaped adhesive sheet laminate is produced. Typical heating and cooling conditions. Since the absolute values of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) in the above examples are both 0.1 N / cm or less, it is confirmed that the peeling force hardly changes before and after heating. [Group 4 of Examples] The production method of the polyester raw materials used in the following Examples 4-1 to 4-5 (hereinafter also collectively referred to as "Group 4 of Examples") is as follows. (Manufacturing method of polyester 4-A) 100 parts of dimethyl terephthalate, 70 parts of ethylene glycol, and 0.07 parts of calcium acetate monohydrate were placed in a reactor, heated and heated, and distilled to remove methanol. The transesterification reaction is performed. After the reaction starts, it takes about 4 and a half hours to raise the temperature to 230 ° C, and the transesterification reaction is substantially ended. Then, 0.04 parts of phosphoric acid and 0.035 parts of antimony trioxide were added, and polymerization was performed according to a conventional method. That is, the reaction temperature was gradually raised to 280 ° C., and the pressure was gradually reduced to 0.05 mmHg. After 4 hours, the reaction was completed, and fragmentation was carried out according to a conventional method to obtain polyester 4-A. The limiting viscosity IV of the obtained polyester chips was 0.70 dl / g. (Manufacturing method of polyester 4-B) In the above-mentioned manufacturing method of polyester 4-A, as dicarboxylic acid units, terephthalic acid is 78 mol%, and isophthalic acid is 22 mol%. Except for this, polyester 4-B was obtained by the same method as polyester A. The limiting viscosity IV of the obtained polyester chips was 0.70 dl / g. (Manufacturing method of polyester 4-C) When manufacturing the above-mentioned polyester 4-A, 6000 ppm of amorphous silicon dioxide having an average particle diameter of 3 μm was added to produce polyester 4-C. (Manufacturing method of polyester 4-D) When manufacturing the above-mentioned polyester 4-A, 6000 ppm of amorphous silicon dioxide having an average particle diameter of 4 μm was added to produce polyester 4-D. [Example 4-1] The raw materials obtained by mixing the polyesters 4-B, 4-A, and 4-D in the proportions of 65% by weight, 30% by weight, and 5% by weight, respectively, were melted by a melt extruder. Extruded to obtain a single layer of amorphous sheet. Then, the sheet is co-extruded onto a cooled casting drum, and allowed to cool and solidify to obtain an unoriented sheet. Then, after being stretched 3.4 times in the mechanical direction (longitudinal) at 80 ° C, it was further subjected to a preheating step in the tenter, and then extended 3.9 times in the direction perpendicular to the mechanical direction (transverse) at 80 ° C. After biaxial stretching, a heat treatment was performed at 185 ° C. for 3 seconds, and then a 6.4% relaxation treatment was performed in the width direction to obtain a polyester film having a thickness of 50 μm. The evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below. [Example 4-2], [Example 4-3] A polyester film was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4-1 except that the conditions shown in Table 4 below were changed. The evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below. [Example 4-4] A raw material obtained by mixing the above polyesters 4-A and 4-C at a ratio of 86% by weight and 14% by weight was used as a raw material for the surface layer, and polyesters 4-B and 4 were used. -A is a raw material prepared by mixing 45% by weight and 55% by weight as a raw material for the intermediate layer. Melt extrusion through different melt extruders, respectively, to obtain two kinds of three-layered (surface layer / intermediate layer / surface layer) amorphous sheet. Then, the sheet is co-extruded onto a cooled casting drum and allowed to cool and solidify to obtain an unoriented sheet. Then, after being stretched 3.4 times in the machine direction (MD) at 82 ° C, it was further subjected to a preheating step in the tenter, and then extended 3.9 times in the direction perpendicular to the machine direction (width direction, TD) at 110 ° C. After biaxial stretching, a heat treatment was performed at 210 ° C. for 3 seconds, and then a relaxation treatment of 2.4% was performed in the width direction to obtain a polyester film having a thickness of 50 μm. The evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below. [Example 4-5] A polyester film was obtained in the same manner as in Example 4-4 except that the conditions shown in Table 4 below were changed. The evaluation results are shown in Table 4 below. <Measurement and evaluation method> The measurement method and evaluation method of various physical property values of the sample obtained in the group 4 of the Example are demonstrated. (1) Storage modulus (E ') Regarding the film obtained in the group 4 of the example, a sample of 30 mm in the length direction and 5 mm in the width direction was collected so that the length direction became the mechanical direction. Next, using a dynamic viscoelastic device ("DVA-220" manufactured by IT Meter and Control), the sample was clamped and fixed with a chuck set at an interval of 20 mm, and the temperature was raised from room temperature at a temperature of 10 ° C / min. The temperature was raised to 200 ° C, and the storage elastic modulus was measured at a frequency of 10 Hz. Based on the obtained data, read the storage elastic modulus at 100 ° C. (2) The heat shrinkage rate is cut from the center of the width direction of the film obtained in Example 4 in the example so that the sample length direction becomes the measurement direction, and the sample is cut into short strips (15 mm wide × 150 mm long). Heat treatment was performed in a tension-free state at 120 ° C for 5 minutes. The length of the sample before and after the heat treatment was measured, and the thermal shrinkage (%) of the film was calculated by the following formula. In the following formula, a is the length of the sample before the heat treatment, and b is the length of the sample after the heat treatment. Heat shrinkage (%) = [(a-b) / a] × 100 (3) Amount of oligomer on the surface of the film after heat treatment For the film obtained in Example Group 4, the temperature is 180 ° C under nitrogen atmosphere. The hot air circulation oven treated the polyester film for 10 minutes. The surface of the polyester film after heat treatment was brought into contact with DMF (dimethylformamide) for 3 minutes to dissolve the oligomer deposited on the surface. This operation can be used, for example, in a voluntary standard for synthetic resin food containers and packaging such as polyolefins, and the method described in the dissolution apparatus used in the single-side dissolution method in the dissolution test. Then, if necessary, adjust the concentration of the obtained DMF by dilution and other methods, and supply it to a liquid chromatograph (Shimadzu LC-2010) to determine the amount of oligomers in the DMF. This value is divided by the area of the membrane that contacts the DMF As the amount of oligomer on the film surface (mg / cm 2 ). The amount of oligomers in DMF was determined from the ratio of the peak area of the standard sample peak area to the measured sample peak area (absolute calibration curve method). The preparation of the standard sample is made by accurately weighing the oligomer (cyclic trimer) collected in advance and dissolving it in DMF accurately weighed. The concentration of the standard sample is preferably in the range of 0.001 to 0.01 mg / ml. (4) Suitability for molding process 15 mass parts (18 mol%) of polymethyl methacrylate macromonomer (Tg: 105 ° C) as a (meth) acrylic copolymer with a number average molecular weight of 2400, and butyl acrylate ( Tg: -55 ° C) 81 parts by mass (75 mol%) and 4 parts by mass (7 mol%) of acrylic acid (Tg: 106 ° C) randomly copolymerized acrylic copolymer (weight average molecular weight 230,000) 1 kg 90 g of glycerin dimethacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Oil Company, product name: GMR) (b-1) as a crosslinking agent, and 2,4,6-trimethyldiphenyl as a photopolymerization initiator 15 g of a mixture of ketone and 4-methylbenzophenone (manufactured by Lanberti Company, product name: Esacure TZT) was uniformly mixed to prepare a resin composition used for an adhesive sheet. The resin composition obtained by using two release films obtained from the polyester film shown in Group 4 of the example to hold the resin composition up and down (the combination of the upper and lower parts is set to hold each other with the same release film), using a laminator The resin composition was formed into a sheet shape so that the thickness of the resin composition became 100 μm, and an adhesive sheet laminate was produced. The release layer side of the polyester film was arranged so as to be in contact with the resin composition. The obtained adhesive sheet laminate system was vacuum-formed (made by Daiichi Sangyo Co., Ltd., FKS-0632-20), and thermoformed by the following process to produce a shaped adhesive sheet laminate. That is, an IR heater preheated at 400 ° C was used to heat the surface of the laminated sheet to 100 ° C, and then a forming mold cooled to 25 ° C was used for 5 seconds under the condition of clamping pressure of 8 MPa. Press forming to produce a shaped adhesive sheet laminate formed by forming irregularities on the surface. The polyester film of the shaped adhesive sheet laminate formed with irregularities was peeled off, and the heights of the concave and convex portions of the shaped adhesive sheet were measured in a non-contact manner using a scanning white interference microscope, respectively. Set to h. The height h of the convex part of the formed body with respect to the depth of the mold of 100 μm was measured. The transfer rate derived from the following calculation formula was 70% or more, and ○, and 50% or more and less than 70% was evaluated as △. , Those who did not reach 50% were evaluated as ×. Transfer rate (%) = h (molded article height) / 100 (die depth) × 100 (5) Adhesive layer appearance (wrinkle) The following evaluation methods were used to evaluate the obtained by the method described in (4), respectively. The appearance of the adhesive laminate before pressing. <Evaluation method> ○: Laminated without wrinkles, and maintained good appearance. ×: Wrinkles are generated in the film, and the wrinkles are transferred to the adhesive layer, and the film cannot be used as a product. [Table 4] [Industrial availability] The shaped adhesive sheet laminate of the present invention is used to form, for example, a personal computer, a mobile terminal (PDA), a game machine, a television (TV), a car navigation system, a touch panel, a tablet, and the like. This type of image display device can be suitably used. The adhesive sheet laminate or coating film of the present invention can be suitably used when forming such a shaped adhesive sheet laminate.

1‧‧‧本賦形黏著片材積層體1‧‧‧ this shaped adhesive sheet laminate

2‧‧‧黏著材層2‧‧‧ Adhesive material layer

2A‧‧‧黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面2A‧‧‧ Adhesive material layer on one side of front and back

2B‧‧‧黏著片材表面凹凸部2B‧‧‧ Concave and convex part on the surface of the adhesive sheet

2C‧‧‧黏著材層之正面及背面之另一側表面2C‧‧‧ Adhesive material layer on the other side

3A‧‧‧被覆部I之正面及背面之一側表面3A‧‧‧ One of the front and back side surfaces of the covered part I

3B‧‧‧被覆部表面凹凸部3B‧‧‧ Surface uneven part

3C‧‧‧片材背面3C‧‧‧ Sheet back

3D‧‧‧保護片材背面凸凹部3D‧‧‧Protects convex and concave portions on the back of the sheet

圖1係模式性地表示作為本發明之實施例之黏著片材積層體之一例的剖視圖。 圖2係用以說明使用作為本發明之實施例之黏著片材積層體之一例製造賦形黏著片材積層體時之加壓步驟之一例的剖視圖。 圖3係模式性地表示作為本發明之實施例之賦形黏著片材積層體之一例的圖,(A)為剖視圖,(B)為立體圖。 圖4係表示實施例、比較例中所製作之黏著片材積層體所使用之材料之黏彈性曲線的圖。 圖5係表示實施例、比較例所使用之模具之一者的立體圖。FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing an example of an adhesive sheet laminate as an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view for explaining an example of a pressure step when a shaped adhesive sheet laminate is produced using an example of the adhesive sheet laminate as an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a view schematically showing an example of a laminated body of shaped adhesive sheet as an embodiment of the present invention, (A) is a cross-sectional view, and (B) is a perspective view. FIG. 4 is a graph showing a viscoelastic curve of a material used for an adhesive sheet laminate produced in Examples and Comparative Examples. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing one of the molds used in Examples and Comparative Examples.

Claims (30)

一種黏著片材積層體,其係具備黏著材層、及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之單面而成之被覆部I者,其特徵在於: 上述被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且上述被覆部I於30℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MB)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa。An adhesive sheet laminated body is provided with an adhesive material layer and a coating portion I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner, characterized in that the above-mentioned coating portion I is at 100 ° C. The storage elastic modulus E '(MA) is 1.0 × 10 6 to 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus E ′ (MB) of the coated portion I at 30 ° C. is 5.0 × 10 7 to 1.0 × 10 10 Pa. 如請求項1之黏著片材積層體,其中上述儲存彈性模數E'(MA)與上述儲存彈性模數E'(MB)滿足以下之關係式(1), (1)E'(MB)/E'(MA)≧2.0。For example, the adhesive sheet laminate of claim 1, wherein the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) and the storage elastic modulus E' (MB) satisfy the following relational expressions (1), (1) E '(MB) /E'(MA)≧2.0. 如請求項1或2之黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層於100℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SA)為1.0以上,且上述黏著材層於30℃下之損耗正切tanδ(SB)未達1.0。For example, the adhesive sheet laminate of claim 1 or 2, wherein the loss tangent tanδ (SA) of the above adhesive material layer at 100 ° C is 1.0 or more, and the loss tangent tanδ (SB) of the above adhesive material layer at 30 ° C is not Up to 1.0. 如請求項1至3中任一項之黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)未達1.0×104 Pa,且上述黏著材層於30℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SB)為1.0×104 Pa以上。For example, the adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the storage elastic modulus G '(SA) of the above adhesive material layer at 100 ° C does not reach 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, and the above adhesive material layer is The storage elastic modulus G '(SB) at 30 ° C is 1.0 × 10 4 Pa or more. 如請求項1至4中任一項之黏著片材積層體,其中上述被覆部I於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'(MA)與上述黏著材層於100℃下之儲存彈性模數G'(SA)滿足以下之關係式(2), (2)1.0×103 ≦E'(MA)/G'(SA)≦1.0×107For example, the adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the storage elastic modulus E '(MA) of the coating portion I at 100 ° C and the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive layer at 100 ° C G '(SA) satisfies the following relational expression (2), (2) 1.0 × 10 3 ≦ E ′ (MA) / G ′ (SA) ≦ 1.0 × 10 7 . 如請求項1至5中任一項之黏著片材積層體,其中上述被覆部I具備被覆基材層與離型層, 該被覆基材層具有以選自由聚酯、共聚合聚酯、聚烯烴及共聚合聚烯烴所組成之群中之1種樹脂或2種以上之樹脂作為主成分之延伸或未延伸之層。The adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the coating portion I includes a coating base material layer and a release layer, and the coating base material layer is selected from the group consisting of polyester, copolymerized polyester, poly One or more resins in the group consisting of olefins and copolymerized polyolefins as the main component of the stretched or unstretched layer. 如請求項1至6中任一項之黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層與上述被覆部I滿足以下之條件(I)~(III), (I)於30℃環境下將上述被覆部I從上述黏著材層剝離時之剝離力F(C)為0.2 N/cm以下; (II)將黏著片材積層體於100℃下加熱5分鐘後冷卻至30℃,於30℃環境下將上述被覆部I從上述黏著材層剝離時之剝離力F(D)為0.2 N/cm以下; (III)剝離力F(C)與剝離力F(D)之差之絕對值為0.1 N/cm以下。For example, the adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the adhesive material layer and the coating portion I satisfy the following conditions (I) to (III), (I) the coating is performed at 30 ° C The peeling force F (C) when the part I was peeled from the above-mentioned adhesive material layer was 0.2 N / cm or less; (II) The adhesive sheet laminate was heated at 100 ° C for 5 minutes, and then cooled to 30 ° C, under the environment of 30 ° C. The peeling force F (D) when peeling the coating portion I from the adhesive material layer is 0.2 N / cm or less; (III) The absolute value of the difference between the peeling force F (C) and the peeling force F (D) is 0.1 N / cm or less. 如請求項1至7中任一項之黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層係由含有(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)、交聯劑(b)及光聚合起始劑(c)之樹脂組合物所形成。The adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the adhesive layer is composed of a (meth) acrylic copolymer (a), a crosslinking agent (b), and a photopolymerization initiator ( c) a resin composition. 一種賦形黏著片材積層體,其係使用如請求項1至8中任一項之黏著片材積層體者,並且 上述黏著材層於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」),且 上述被覆部I密接於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面,於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被覆部表面凹凸部」),且於與上述正面及背面之一側為相反側之正面及背面之另一側表面具備形成有與上述黏著材層表面凹凸部相符之凹凸的凸部、凹部或凸凹部(稱為「被覆部背面凸凹部」)。A shaped adhesive sheet laminated body, which uses the adhesive sheet laminated body according to any one of claims 1 to 8, and the adhesive layer is provided with recesses, protrusions, or irregularities on one of the front and back side surfaces. (The "concave and convex portion on the surface of the adhesive material layer"), and the covering portion I is in close contact with one of the front and back surfaces of the adhesive material layer, and has concave, convex, or uneven portions on the front and back surfaces (Referred to as "concave-convex part on the surface of the coating part"), and the surface on the other side of the front side and the back side opposite to one of the front and back sides is provided with projections corresponding to the uneven portions on the surface of the adhesive layer Part, concave part, or convex-concave part (referred to as "convex-convex part convex-concave part"). 如請求項9之賦形黏著片材積層體,其中上述黏著材層係用以將2個被黏著體貼合之雙面黏著片材, 上述黏著材層表面凹凸部係與上述任一被黏著體之被黏著面中之凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被黏著體表面凹凸部」)相符者。For example, the laminated adhesive sheet laminated body according to claim 9, wherein the adhesive layer is a double-sided adhesive sheet for bonding two adherends, and the uneven portion on the surface of the adhesive layer is connected to any of the adherends. The concave part, convex part, or uneven part in the adhered surface (referred to as "convex part on the surface of the adherend"). 如請求項10之賦形黏著片材積層體,其中上述任一被黏著體係選自由表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板所組成之群中之任一者。For example, the shaped adhesive sheet laminate of claim 10, wherein any one of the above-mentioned adhered systems is selected from the group consisting of a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel. 一種賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其特徵在於:其係加熱如請求項1至8中任一項之黏著片材積層體,藉由加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形或輥壓成形而對上述黏著片材之至少單面賦形凹凸形狀。A method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body, characterized in that it is heating the adhesive sheet laminated body according to any one of claims 1 to 8, and applies pressure forming, vacuum forming, pressure forming or rolls The at least one side of the above-mentioned adhesive sheet is formed into a concave-convex shape by press forming. 一種塗佈膜,其特徵在於:其係構成如請求項1至8中任一項之黏著片材積層體之被覆部I者,並且 其係於共聚合聚酯膜之至少單面設置有塗佈層之塗佈膜,其於100℃下之儲存彈性模數E'為1.5×109 Pa以下,且於120℃下加熱5分鐘後之收縮率為3.0%以下。A coating film characterized in that it constitutes the coating part I of the adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 8 and is provided on at least one side of the copolymerized polyester film with a coating The coating film of the cloth layer has a storage elastic modulus E ′ at 100 ° C. of 1.5 × 10 9 Pa or less, and a shrinkage rate of 3.0% or less after heating at 120 ° C. for 5 minutes. 如請求項13之塗佈膜,其中100℃之儲存彈性模數E'為1.0×108 Pa以上。For example, the coating film of claim 13, wherein the storage elastic modulus E 'at 100 ° C is 1.0 × 10 8 Pa or more. 如請求項13或14之塗佈膜,其於180℃下加熱10分鐘後之表面低聚物量為1.0×10-3 mg/cm2 以下。For example, the coating film of claim 13 or 14 has a surface oligomer amount of 1.0 × 10 -3 mg / cm 2 or less after heating at 180 ° C for 10 minutes. 如請求項13至15中任一項之塗佈膜,其中上述塗佈層係含有硬化型聚矽氧樹脂之離型層。The coating film according to any one of claims 13 to 15, wherein the coating layer is a release layer containing a hardened silicone resin. 一種賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,該賦形黏著片材積層體係具備具有黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,且於該黏著材之一面賦形凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」)而成之構成者,該製造方法之特徵在於: 其係具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,並對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,將經加熱之黏著片材積層體進行成形,並且加以冷卻而製造賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,並且 對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa之狀態下結束成形。A manufacturing method of a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body, the shaped adhesive sheet laminated system has a coating part I having an adhesive material layer and a peelable layer laminated on one side of the adhesive material layer, and the adhesive The manufacturing method is characterized by forming a concave portion, a convex portion, or an uneven portion on one surface of a material (referred to as "an uneven portion on the surface of an adhesive material layer"). The manufacturing method is characterized in that it is provided with an adhesive material layer and laminated in a peelable manner. Covering part I formed on one side of the adhesive material layer, heating the adhesive sheet laminate, forming the heated adhesive sheet laminate, and cooling to manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet laminate Method, and heating the laminated sheet body, starting to form when the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering part I is 1.0 × 10 6 to 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and storing elasticity in the covering part I The molding was completed in a state where the modulus E '(MF) was 5.0 × 10 7 to 1.0 × 10 10 Pa. 如請求項17之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其係對具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I之黏著片材積層體進行加熱,並且使用經冷卻之模具將經加熱之黏著片材積層體進行成形。For example, the method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to claim 17 is performed on an adhesive sheet laminate having an adhesive material layer and a covering part I formed by laminating on one side of the adhesive material layer in a peelable manner. Heat, and use a cooled mold to form the heated adhesive sheet laminate. 如請求項17或18之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述成形開始時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)與上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)滿足以下之關係式(1), (1)・・E'(MF)/E'(MS)≧1.3。For example, the method for manufacturing a laminated body of shaped adhesive sheet according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) of the covering portion I at the beginning of the above-mentioned molding and the storage elastic modulus of the covering portion I at the end of the above-mentioned molding The number E '(MF) satisfies the following relational expression (1), (1) · E' (MF) / E '(MS) ≧ 1.3. 如請求項17至19中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其係對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MS)為1.0×106 ~2.0×109 Pa,且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SS)未達1.0×104 Pa之狀態下開始成形, 於被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)為5.0×107 ~1.0×1010 Pa,且黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)為1.0×104 Pa以上之狀態下結束成形。For example, the method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 17 to 19, wherein the adhesive sheet laminate is heated, and the storage elastic modulus E '(MS) in the coating portion I is 1.0 × 10 6 ~ 2.0 × 10 9 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus G ′ (SS) of the adhesive material layer does not reach 1.0 × 10 4 Pa, and the storage elastic modulus E ′ (MF) of the covering part I The molding is completed in a state of 5.0 × 10 7 to 1.0 × 10 10 Pa and the storage elastic modulus G ′ (SF) of the adhesive material layer is 1.0 × 10 4 Pa or more. 如請求項17至20中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述成形結束時之被覆部I之儲存彈性模數E'(MF)與上述成形結束時之黏著材層之儲存彈性模數G'(SF)滿足以下之關係式(2), (2)E'(MF)/G'(SF)≦1.0×107The method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 17 to 20, wherein the storage elastic modulus E '(MF) of the covering portion I at the end of the above-mentioned forming and the adhesive material layer at the end of the above-mentioned forming The storage elastic modulus G '(SF) satisfies the following relational expression (2), (2) E' (MF) / G '(SF) ≦ 1.0 × 10 7 . 一種賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,該賦形黏著片材積層體係具備具有黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I,且於該黏著材之一面賦形凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」)而成之構成者,該製造方法之特徵在於: 其係對具備黏著材層及以可剝離之方式積層於該黏著材層之一面而成之被覆部I的黏著片材積層體進行加熱,利用模具將經加熱之黏著片材積層體成形而製造賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,並且 對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,於被覆部I之表面溫度為70~180℃之狀態下開始成形,於被覆部I之表面溫度成為未達60℃後從模具取出賦形黏著片材積層體。A manufacturing method of a shaped adhesive sheet laminated body, the shaped adhesive sheet laminated system has a coating part I having an adhesive material layer and a peelable layer laminated on one side of the adhesive material layer, and the adhesive The manufacturing method is characterized by forming a concave portion, a convex portion, or an uneven portion on one surface of a material (referred to as "an uneven portion on the surface of an adhesive material layer"). The manufacturing method is characterized in that it is provided with an adhesive material layer and is peelable. The adhesive sheet laminate of the coating portion I laminated on one side of the adhesive layer is heated, and the heated adhesive sheet laminate is formed by a mold to manufacture a shaped adhesive sheet laminate. The adhesive sheet laminate is heated, forming is started when the surface temperature of the coating part I is 70 to 180 ° C, and the shaped adhesive sheet laminate is taken out from the mold after the surface temperature of the coating part I becomes less than 60 ° C. 如請求項22之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其係藉由加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形、輥壓成形及壓縮成形中之任一成形方法進行成形。For example, the method for manufacturing a laminated body of shaped adhesive sheet according to claim 22 is formed by any one of the forming methods of pressure forming, vacuum forming, air forming, roll forming and compression forming. 如請求項22或23之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其係使用上述成形方法而連續製造。If the manufacturing method of the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body of Claim 22 or 23 is performed continuously using the said shaping | molding method. 如請求項17至24中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述被覆部I具備被覆基材層與離型層, 該被覆基材層具有以選自由未延伸聚酯、延伸聚酯、共聚合聚酯、未延伸聚烯烴、延伸聚烯烴及共聚合聚烯烴所組成之群中之1種樹脂或2種以上之樹脂作為主成分之層。The manufacturing method of the shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 17 to 24, wherein the coating portion I includes a coating base material layer and a release layer, and the coating base material layer is One or more resins in the group consisting of polyester, copolymerized polyester, unstretched polyolefin, stretched polyolefin, and copolymerized polyolefin as the main component. 如請求項17至25中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述黏著材層係由含有(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚物(a)、交聯劑(b)及光聚合起始劑(c)之樹脂組合物所形成。The method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 17 to 25, wherein the adhesive layer is composed of a (meth) acrylic copolymer (a), a crosslinking agent (b), and a light Formed from the resin composition of the polymerization initiator (c). 如請求項17至26中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中於上述賦形黏著片材積層體中,上述黏著材層於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「黏著材層表面凹凸部」),且 上述被覆部I密接於上述黏著材層之正面及背面之一側表面,於正面及背面之一側表面具備凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被覆部表面凹凸部」),且於與上述正面及背面之一側為相反側之正面及背面之另一側表面具備與上述被覆部表面凹凸部相對應而形成凹凸之凸部、凹部或凸凹部(稱為「被覆部背面凸凹部」)。According to the method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to any one of claims 17 to 26, in the shaped adhesive sheet laminate, the above-mentioned adhesive material layer is provided with recesses and protrusions on one of the front and back side surfaces. (The "concave and convex portion on the surface of the adhesive material layer"), and the covering portion I is in close contact with one of the front and back side surfaces of the adhesive material layer, and has concave and convex portions on the front and back side surfaces Or asperities (referred to as "covered part surface asperities"), and the asperities are formed on the other side of the front and back surfaces opposite to one of the front and back surfaces to form asperities Convex part, concave part, or convex concave part (referred to as "convex part back convex part"). 如請求項27之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述黏著材層係用以將2個被黏著體貼合之雙面黏著片材, 上述黏著材層表面凹凸部係與上述任一被黏著體之被黏著面中之凹部、凸部或凹凸部(稱為「被黏著體表面凹凸部」)相符者。For example, the method for manufacturing a laminated body of laminated adhesive sheet according to claim 27, wherein the above-mentioned adhesive layer is a double-sided adhesive sheet for bonding two adherends, and the uneven portion on the surface of the adhesive layer is in accordance with any of the above. Concave, convex, or uneven portions on the adhered surface of the adherend (referred to as "convex portions on the adherend surface"). 如請求項28之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其中上述任一被黏著體係選自由表面保護面板、觸控面板及圖像顯示面板所組成之群中之任一者。For example, the method for manufacturing a shaped adhesive sheet laminate according to claim 28, wherein any one of the above-mentioned adhered systems is selected from the group consisting of a surface protection panel, a touch panel, and an image display panel. 如請求項17至29中任一項之賦形黏著片材積層體之製造方法,其係對黏著片材積層體進行加熱,藉由加壓成形、真空成形、壓空成形或輥壓成形而對上述黏著片材之至少單面賦形凹凸形狀。The manufacturing method of the shaped adhesive sheet laminated body according to any one of claims 17 to 29, which comprises heating the adhesive sheet laminated body by press forming, vacuum forming, air forming or roll forming. A concave-convex shape is formed on at least one side of the adhesive sheet.
TW106131371A 2016-09-15 2017-09-13 Adhesive sheet laminate, shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and method for producing the same TWI761369B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016180131 2016-09-15
JP??2016-180131 2016-09-15
JP2017007720 2017-01-19
JP??2017-007720 2017-01-19
JP??2017-007721 2017-01-19
JP2017007721 2017-01-19
JP2017042839A JP6880839B2 (en) 2017-03-07 2017-03-07 Coating film and adhesive sheet laminate
JP??2017-042839 2017-03-07

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201819185A true TW201819185A (en) 2018-06-01
TWI761369B TWI761369B (en) 2022-04-21

Family

ID=61618737

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW106131371A TWI761369B (en) 2016-09-15 2017-09-13 Adhesive sheet laminate, shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and method for producing the same
TW110125159A TWI798747B (en) 2016-09-15 2017-09-13 coating film

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW110125159A TWI798747B (en) 2016-09-15 2017-09-13 coating film

Country Status (4)

Country Link
KR (4) KR102426469B1 (en)
CN (4) CN113462311A (en)
TW (2) TWI761369B (en)
WO (1) WO2018051857A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI888476B (en) * 2020-03-31 2025-07-01 日商三菱化學股份有限公司 Active energy ray-curable adhesive sheet, adhesive sheet, multilayer body for image display device, image display device, and method for manufacturing multilayer body for image display device

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113825609B (en) * 2019-05-24 2024-04-26 Dic株式会社 Adhesive sheet, article, and method for manufacturing the article
CN114127205B (en) * 2019-06-26 2022-10-25 三菱瓦斯化学株式会社 Resin sheet, metal foil-clad laminate, and printed wiring board
CN113400654B (en) * 2021-06-03 2023-03-10 芜湖骏宇新材料科技有限公司 Multifunctional thermal diaphragm machine for processing plastic products
EP4101635A1 (en) * 2021-06-11 2022-12-14 Whitestone Co., Ltd. Display protector

Family Cites Families (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4529072B2 (en) * 2003-09-02 2010-08-25 東洋紡績株式会社 Polyester film for molding and molded member formed by molding the same
JP2006169467A (en) * 2004-12-20 2006-06-29 Mitsubishi Polyester Film Copp Optical polyester film
JP5236315B2 (en) * 2008-03-03 2013-07-17 三菱樹脂株式会社 Polyester film for simultaneous transfer of molding
JP2010072471A (en) * 2008-09-19 2010-04-02 Three M Innovative Properties Co Transparent adhesive sheet, image display apparatus comprising the same, and method for producing the image display apparatus
JP5832452B2 (en) * 2011-01-11 2015-12-16 三井化学東セロ株式会社 Release film
JP2012192614A (en) * 2011-03-16 2012-10-11 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd In-molding transfer foil
JP2013120804A (en) * 2011-12-06 2013-06-17 Daicel Corp Sheet-like covering agent, and method for covering or method for manufacturing electronic device
KR102214626B1 (en) 2012-11-09 2021-02-10 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Double-sided adhesive sheet for image display device, double-sided adhesive sheet with release film for image display device and image display device using same
KR101821257B1 (en) * 2012-11-22 2018-01-23 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Substrate-less double-sided adhesive sheet
WO2014097757A1 (en) * 2012-12-17 2014-06-26 三菱樹脂株式会社 Base-less double-sided adhesive sheet
HK1211904A1 (en) * 2013-04-24 2016-06-03 尤尼吉可株式会社 Mold release film for led production
JP6239302B2 (en) * 2013-07-31 2017-11-29 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet and optical member
CN105451954A (en) * 2013-09-10 2016-03-30 旭化成化学株式会社 Release film, method for manufacturing molded article, semiconductor component, and reflector component
WO2015137178A1 (en) * 2014-03-10 2015-09-17 三菱樹脂株式会社 Method for manufacturing layered body used to constitute image display device
JP5786996B1 (en) * 2014-03-25 2015-09-30 住友ベークライト株式会社 Release film
JP2015201602A (en) * 2014-04-10 2015-11-12 昭和電工株式会社 Laminate sheet, heat sink, and method for manufacturing laminate sheet
KR101917266B1 (en) * 2014-05-13 2018-11-09 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Method for manufacturing double-sided adhesive sheet for image display device
JP6772837B2 (en) * 2014-12-03 2020-10-21 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Adhesive sheet laminate and image display device component laminate

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI888476B (en) * 2020-03-31 2025-07-01 日商三菱化學股份有限公司 Active energy ray-curable adhesive sheet, adhesive sheet, multilayer body for image display device, image display device, and method for manufacturing multilayer body for image display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113462311A (en) 2021-10-01
TWI798747B (en) 2023-04-11
CN109715753B (en) 2021-12-07
KR102426469B1 (en) 2022-07-29
KR20220025253A (en) 2022-03-03
KR102457647B1 (en) 2022-10-24
CN113462310A (en) 2021-10-01
WO2018051857A1 (en) 2018-03-22
KR20190055822A (en) 2019-05-23
CN109715753A (en) 2019-05-03
TWI761369B (en) 2022-04-21
KR20220025254A (en) 2022-03-03
KR20220025251A (en) 2022-03-03
CN113444459A (en) 2021-09-28
TW202138195A (en) 2021-10-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2786876B1 (en) Transfer film for in-mold injection showing three-dimensional pattern, and preparation method thereof
CN106132704B (en) Transfer film for 3D molding
TWI534009B (en) Forming body, material for front cover of display, and image display device
TWI663240B (en) Adhesive film
TWI761369B (en) Adhesive sheet laminate, shaped adhesive sheet laminate, and method for producing the same
CN104995028B (en) Transfer film for decoration
JP5824725B2 (en) Active energy ray-curable resin composition
JP6870675B2 (en) Transfer film for 3D molding
TW201730008A (en) Decorative sheet
JP5297180B2 (en) Laminated polyester film for skin material and composite molded body with improved tactile sensation using the same
JP6984250B2 (en) Manufacturing method of excipient adhesive sheet laminate
TW202132439A (en) Manufacturing method of b-stage coat, manufacturing method of three-dimensional molded body
JP6984249B2 (en) Adhesive sheet laminate, excipient adhesive sheet laminate and its manufacturing method
WO2020179524A1 (en) Resin sheet for high hardness molding and molded article using same
JP5226411B2 (en) Laminated polyester film for skin material and composite molded body with improved tactile sensation using the same
JP6880839B2 (en) Coating film and adhesive sheet laminate
JP7006044B2 (en) Manufacturing method of excipient adhesive sheet laminate
JP7355099B2 (en) Transfer film for three-dimensional molding and method for manufacturing resin molded products
TW201730312A (en) Adhesive and articles for use therewith